GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5
Reference Manual
SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E
SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE(V)
MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal
• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •
(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the
programmable controller system, please read the CPU module user's manual.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! DANGER resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the ! CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[Test Operation Instructions]

! DANGER
• Before performing test operation (bit device on/off, word device's present value changing,
timer/counter's set value and present value changing, buffer memory's present value changing)
for a user-created monitor screen, system monitoring, special module monitoring or ladder
monitoring, read the manual carefully to fully understand how to operate the equipment.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform
significant operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
A-1
Precautions for using this software (important)
1. Memory of the personal computer used
Processing may be terminated by Microsoft® Windows® 95 operation systm, Microsoft® Windows® 98
operation systm, Microsoft® WindowsNT® Workstation4.0 operation systm on some personal computer
models having main memory of not more than 32M bytes. Therefore, use them after increasing the main
memory to 32M bytes or more.
2. Free space on the hard disk
While this software is running, free space of at least 50M byte is required on the hard disk.
Since free space of 50M byte is required by Windows® 95, Windows® 98, WindowsNT® 4.0 as the swap
area, Windows® 95, Windows® 98, WindowsNT® 4.0 may forcibly terminate the program if that free space is
used up while the drawing software is running. Produce a sufficient amount of free space on the hard disk
before using the drawing software. If you have to use the drawing software with an amount of free space that
is barely above the requirement, save project data as often as possible.
When GT Simulator is used with GX Developer or GX Simulator, free space is required separately.
Refer to the GX Developer or GX Simulator Operating Manual for the free space required for use of GX
Developer or GX Simulator.
3. Using a spin box in a dialog box
• Do not enter into a spin box a numerical value with a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum
number of digits that can be entered into the spin box. Entering a number of digits that drastically exceeds
the maximum allowable number of digits may cause a forcible termination of the program.
• On the [Action] tab selectable from the [Touch key] dialog box, the spin box provided for selecting a key
code does not display the key codes in the order of valid key codes when it displays the key codes for the
special keys used by such functions as the alarm history display, data list display, and alarm list (user
alarm) display. When you keep on clicking the button, therefore, the key codes will not be scrolled forward
or backward in the order of the valid key codes. (Clicking the button when the spin box displays "FFEF",
for example, will not display "FFB0" as the valid key code that comes next in the order.)
To specify such a key code for a special key associated with an object, use the keyboard the type the key
code into the spin box instead of making a selection from the spin box.
4. Operation on a table in a dialog box
To select a line on a table when specifying a object display range, for example, click on any part of the line
except the number display column. Clicking on the number display column on a line does not select the line.
If you clicked on the number display column on a line, that line is displayed in reverse video; click on the
number display column again to resume the display in normal video.
5. Instructions for displaying any line other than a continuous line (such as a dotted line) in boldface type
When any line other than a continuous line is drawn in boldface type, the personal computer screen may not
display the line type properly. However, it is displayed properly on the GOT and there are no problems in data.
6. Measures against the year 2000 (Y2K) problem

The GOT reads and displays the clock information from the PLC. When the GOT is connected to the
Mitsubishi PLC/Mitsubishi motion controller or is used with the A9GT-RS2T, continuous operation or restart
of the GOT will present no problem since the PLC/motion controller/A9GT-RS2T itself will perform 1999-to-
2000 roll-over operation and leap compensation properly. (No measures required) When connected to a
third party PLC, however, the GOT reads and displays the clock data from the third party PLC. Therefore,
contact the corresponding company for the clock data when the GOT is connected to the third party PLC.
7. About the messages displayed at start
"Internal error: null pointer access"
If the above error has appeared, change the setting in the following procedure.
1) Click the "Start" button, point to the [Settings]-[Control Panel] menu, and click.
2) Double-click the "Regional Settings" icon.
3) As the [Regional Settings Property] dialog box appears, choose "English". If the above message appears
with the setting of "English", choose the language other than English and restart the personal computer.
After a start, choose "English" again and restart the personal computer.
"Abnormal termination"
If the above error has appeared, check whether the hard disk has the free capacity of 50MB or more.
A-2
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Aug., 2000 SH (NA) 080117-A First edition
Japanese Manual Version SH-080112-A
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-3
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................A- 1
Precautions for using this software (important).............................................................................................A- 2
REVISIONS ....................................................................................................................................................A- 3
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................A- 4
CONTENTS....................................................................................................................................................A- 4
About Manuals ...............................................................................................................................................A- 8
Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual ...........................................................................................A- 9
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1- 2
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 6
2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen ........................................................................................... 2- 1

2.1.1 System configuration......................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Operation environment...................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation........................................................... 2- 2
2.2.1 System configuration......................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable .............................................................................................................. 2- 4
2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used) .................................................... 2- 5
CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3- 1 to 3-18
3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools ................................................................................................ 3- 1

3.2 Menu Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 3- 6
3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.4 Operation of Template ............................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.5 Operation of Tool Palette......................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.6 How to Use Help ...................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6.1 Help menu makeup ........................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.2 Printing the help screen .................................................................................................................... 3-18
CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION 4- 1 to 4-45
4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created.................................................................................................. 4- 1

4.1.1 Base screen....................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Window screen.................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.1.3 About the report screen..................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes............................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.1 Types of drawing figures ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.2 Attribute type for selection................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format.............................................................................................................. 4-15
A-4
4.2.4 Character size by magnification........................................................................................................ 4-16
4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure ............................................................................................................. 4-17
4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions ........................................................................ 4-18
4.3.1 Types of available object functions................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set ..................................................................... 4-20
4.4 Overlap Setting......................................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.4.1 Figure and object............................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.4.2 Objects............................................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.5 Available Devices..................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT .................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series........................................................................... 4-33
4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series........................................................................... 4-43
CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5- 1 to 5-124
5.1 Data Display Functions ............................................................................................................................ 5- 2

5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value) .................................. 5- 2
5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values) .......................... 5- 5
5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string).... 5- 8
5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU) ................................................. 5-11
5.2 Message Display Functions..................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.1 Comment display function
(shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of monitor device) .................................... 5-14
5.2.2 Alarm history display function
(shows a history of occurrence times, comments and others when a condition is enabled) .......... 5-18
5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error occurrence).......... 5-24
5.3 Animation Display Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device).......................................... 5-27
5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device) ....... 5-30
5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value) ............................. 5-33
5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value) ........................... 5-36
5.4 Graph Display Functions ......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph).................................... 5-39
5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph) .......................................... 5-42
5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph)............................................ 5-45
5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph) ........................ 5-48
5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart) .......................... 5-51
5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level) ....................................................... 5-54
5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device Value Change
and Screen Switching) ............................................................................................................................. 5-57
5.6 Data Input Functions................................................................................................................................ 5-68
5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)...................................................................... 5-68
5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)............................................................ 5-72
5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)................................................... 5-75
5.8 Other Object Functions ............................................................................................................................ 5-79
5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file) ...................................... 5-79
5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU) ..................... 5-82
5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled) .......... 5-84
A-5
5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen)................. 5-88
5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range)............................................... 5-90
5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT).......................................................................................... 5-94
5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU) ............................................................. 5-96
5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)........................................... 5-97
5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally) ....................................................................... 5-98
5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time) ............................................ 5-100
5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition).......................................... 5-103
5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program) ................................................. 5-105
5.9 Useful Functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-108
5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity) ..................................................................... 5-108
5.9.2 Security function (limits users) ........................................................................................................ 5-114
5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device) ............................................ 5-118
5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT)................................ 5-120
CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT 6- 1 to 6-10
6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures............................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.3 Operations for Object Setting .................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen................................................................................................ 6- 3
6.5 Installation Operations of System Program ............................................................................................ 6- 4
6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT..................................................................................... 6- 4
6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program............................................................ 6- 5
6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS................................................................................................................. 6- 7
6.5.4 Installation of OS ............................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.6 Download of Screen Data........................................................................................................................ 6- 9
6.7 Debugging of Screen Data ...................................................................................................................... 6-10
CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7- 1 to 7-26
7.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1 Features............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.1.2 Operating instructions ....................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 5
7.2.1 Types ................................................................................................................................................. 7- 5
7.2.2 Control structure................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods ........................................................................................ 7- 9
7.2.4 Script execution .......................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution..................................................................................................... 7-16
7.4 Program Examples .................................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function.................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions.................................................... 7-18
7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function................................................................................. 7-20
7.5 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger ............................................................... 7-22
7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT.............................................................. 7-24
A-6
APPENDICES App- 1 to App-22
Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data..............................................................App- 1

Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)...........................................................................App- 5
Appendix3 List of Key Code ......................................................................................................................App- 7
Appendix4 Drawing Sheet .........................................................................................................................App-10
Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value).......................................................App-14
Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area
(Memory Map) .........................................................................................................................App-14
Appendix7 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5
/ GT Designer Version5...........................................................................................................App-15
INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 3
A-7
About Manuals
The following manuals related to this product are available. Obtain the manuals as
required the according to this table.
• Related manual
Manual name Manual number (Model code)

GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 Operating Manual (Start up Manual)
Describes how to install GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 into a personal computer and IB-0800143
how to browse the online manuals. (13JU06)
(Found in the packing of the GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5)
GOT900 Series Operating Manual (Introductory Manual)
For those who use the GOT for the first time, describes the way to create a monitor screen on GT SH-080116
Designer, transfer monitor data to the GOT, and display it on the screen. (13JU07)
(Available as option)
GT Simulator Version5 Operating Manual
SH-080120
Explains the system configuration, screen makeup and using methods of GT Simulator.
(13JU09)
A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT User’s Manual
Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option
SH-4005
unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and
(13JL70)
error codes of A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT unit.
A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT User’s Manual
Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option
SH-080018
unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and
(13JL92)
error codes of A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT unit.
GOT-A900 Series User’s Manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible
Connection System Manual)
SH-080119
Gives the specifications, system configuration, setting method and connection diagram of each
(13JR20)
connection form available for the GOT-A900 series.
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible
Extended • Option Functions Manual)
Provides the specifications of the utility, system monitoring, ladder monitoring, special function unit SH-080118
monitoring, network monitoring functions and list editor functions available for the GOT-A900 series (13JU08)
and how to operate the dedicated monitor screen.
F940GOT-SWD-E/LWD-E HARDWARE MANUAL
Explains the specifications, part names, and grounding of the F940GOT. JY992D79201
(Found in the packing of the F940GOT unit)
F940GOT-SWD-E, F940GOT-LWD-E OPERATION MANUAL
Describes the specifications, system configuration and connection diagram of each connection
format available for the GOT-F900 series, the specifications of the utility functions, HPP mode and
JY992D78001
special function module monitoring function available for the GOT-F900 series, and how to perform
operation on the dedicated monitor screen.
(Sent separately)
A-8
Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual
Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as
follows:
Abbreviations, generic terms
Description
and special terms
A985GOT Generic term of A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD and A985GOT-TBA-EU
Generic term of A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD and
A975GOT
A975GOT-TBA-EU
Generic term of A970GOT-TBA-B A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA, A970GOT-TBD,
A970GOT A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD, A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD, A970GOT-TBA-EU and
A970GOT-SBA-EU
A97*GOT Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT
A960GOT Generic term of A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD and A960GOT-EBA-EU
Generic term of A956GOT-TBD, A956GOT-SBD, A956GOT-LBD, A956GOT-TBD-M3,
A956GOT
A956GOT-SBD-M3 and A956GOT-LBD-M3
GOT Generic term of A953GOT-TBD, A953GOT-SBD, A953GOT-LBD, A953GOT-TBD-M3,
A953GOT
A951GOT
Generic term of A951GOT-QTBD, A951GOT-QSBD, A951GOT-QLBD, A951GOT-QTBD-M3,
A951GOT-Q
A951GOT-QSBD-M3 and A951GOT-QLBD-M3
A950GOT
A950 handy GOT Generic term of A953GOT-SBD-M3-H and A953GOT-LBD-M3-H
Generic term of A956GOT, A953GOT, A951GOT, A951GOT-Q, A950GOT and A950 handy
A95*GOT
GOT
Communica- Bus connection board Generic term of A9GT-QBUSS, A9GT-QBUS2S, A9GT-BUSS and A9GT-BUS2S
tion board Serial communication board Generic term of A9GT-RS4, A9GT-RS2 and A9GT-RS2T
Generic term of A9GT-QBUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A7GT-BUSS and A7GT-
Bus connection unit
BUS2S
Communica-
Data link unit Generic term of A7GT-J71AP23, A7GT-J71AR23 and A7GT-J71AT23B
tion unit
Network unit Generic term of A7GT-J71LP23 and A7GT-J71BR13
CC-Link communication unit Generic term of A8GT-J61BT13 and A8GT-J61BT15
Abbreviation of A9GT-80PSC, A9GT-70PSC, A9GT-60PSC and A9GT-50PSC type
Protection sheet
transparent protection sheets
Abbreviation of A9GT-80LTT, A9GT-70LTTB, A9GT-70LTT, A9GT-70LTS and
Backlight
A9GT-50LT type backlights
Debug stand Abbreviation of A9GT-80STAND, A9GT-70STAND and A9GT-50STAND type debug stand
PC card ( memory card ) Abbreviation of PC card with PCMCIA Ver.2.1
Option
Abbreviation of A9GT-FNB, A9GT-FNB1M, A9GT-FNB2M, A9GT-FNB4M, A9GT-FNB8M,
Memory board
A9GT-QFNB, A9GT-QFNB4M, A9GT-QFNB8M type option function memory board
Attachment Generic term of A77GT-96ATT/A85GT-95ATT/A87GT-96ATT/A87GT-97ATT attachments
Ten-key Panel Abbreviation of A8GT-TK ten-key Panel
A7GT-CNB Abbreviation of A7GT-CNB bus connector conversion box
A9GT-QCNB Abbreviation of A9GT-QCNB bus connector conversion box
External I/O unit Abbreviation of A9GT-70KBF and A8GT-50KBF type external I/O interface unit
Option unit Printer interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT-50PRF type printer interface unit
Memory card interface unit Abbreviation of A1SD59J-MIF memory card interface unit
GT Works Version 5 SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package
Generic term of SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package and SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV
GT Designer Version 5
software package
GT Designer Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900
GT Simulator Abbreviation of GT Simulator screen simulator GOT900
Software GT Converter Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900
GT Debugger Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger
GT Manager Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900
GX Developer Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages
Generic term of SW D5C-LLT-E ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simurator
(SW5D5C-LLT-E or later)
A-9
Abbreviations, generic terms
Description
and special terms
QCPU (Q Mode) Generic term of Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU CPU units
QCPU (A Mode) Generic term of Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A and Q06HCPU-A CPU units
QCPU Generic term of QCPU (Q Mode) and QCPU (A Mode)
QnACPU (Large Type) Generic term of Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU CPU units
QnACPU (Small Type) Generic term of Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU-S1 CPU units
QnACPU Generic term of QnACPU (Large Type) and QnACPU (Small Type)
AnUCPU Generic term of A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU and A4UCPU CPU units
AnACPU Generic term of A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1 and A3ACPU CPU units
AnNCPU Generic term of A1NCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1 and A3NCPU CPU units
ACPU (Large Type) Generic term of AnUCPU, AnACPU and AnNCPU CPU units
CPU
A2US(H)CPU Generic term of A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1 and A2USHCPU-S1 CPU units
AnS(H)CPU Generic term of A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU and A2SHCPU CPU units
A1SJ(H)CPU Generic term of A1SJCPU-S3 and A1SJHCPU CPU units
ACPU (Small Type) Generic term of A2US(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU and A1SJ(H)CPU CPU units
ACPU Generic term of ACPU (Large Type), ACPU (Small Type) and A1FXCPU CPU units
Generic term of FX0 series, FX0N series, FX0S series, FX1 series, FX1S series, FX2 series ,
FXCPU
FX2C series, FX2N series, FX2NC series CPU unit
Generic term of A373UCPU, A373UCPU-S3, A273UCPU, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3,
Motion controller CPU
A171SCPU-S3, A171SHCPU, A172SHCPU CPU unit
FA controller Generic term of LM610, LM7600, LM8000 CPU unit
Generic term of C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, CQM1,
Omron PLC
C1000H,C2000H,CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21, CS1 CPU unit
Generic term of GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120, GL130, CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920,
Yasukawa PLC
MP-930, CP-9200(H) and PROGIC-8 CPU unit
Generic term of SLC500-20, SLC500-30, SLC500-40, SLC5/01 SLC5/02, SLC5/03,
SLC500 Series
SLC5/04 SLC5/05
Generic term of 1761-L10BWA, 1761-L10BWB, 1761-L16AWA, 1761-L16BWA, 1761-
MicroLogix1000 Series L16BWB, 1761-L16BBB, 1761-L32AWA, 1761-L32BWA, 1761-L32BWB, 1761-L32BBB,
1761-L32AAA, 1761-L20AWA-5A, 1761-L20BWA-5A, 1761-L20BWB-5A
MicroLogix1500 Series Abbreviation of 1764-LSP
Allen-Bradley PLC Generic term of SLC 500 Series, MicroLogix1000 Series, MicroLogix1500 Series
Generic term of JW-21CU, JW-22CU, JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH, JW-50CUH,
Other PLC Sharp PLC
JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH CPU unit
Toshiba PLC Generic term of T3, T3H CPU unit
SIEMENS PLC Generic term of SIMATIC S7-300 Series and SIMATIC S7-400 Series CPU unit
Generic term of H-302(CPU2-03H), H-702(CPU2-07H), H-1002(CPU2-10H), H-2002(CPU2-
Large type H series
20H), H-4010(CPU3-40H),.J-300(CPU-03Ha), H-700(CPU-07Ha), H-2000(CPU-20Ha)
Generic term of H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H), H-250(CPU21-02H), H-252(CPU22-02H), H-
H200 to 252 Series
252B(CPU22-02HB), H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
Generic term of H-20DR, H-28DR, H-40DR, H-64DR, H-20DT, H-28DT, H-40DT, H-64DT,
H Series board type
HL-40DR, HL-64DR
EH-150 Series Generic term of EH-CPU104, EH-CPU208, EH-CPU308, EH-CPU316
HITACHI PLC
Generic term of large type H series,H-200 to 252 Series H Series board type, EH-150 Series
(HIDIC H Series)
Memory abbreviation of mmory (flash memory) in the GOT
OS Abreviation of GOT system software
Others
Object Setting data for dynamic image
Personal Computer Personal computer where the corresponding software package is installed
In this manual, the following products are called by new names.

Old Name New Name Remarks
GPPW GX Developer Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages
A - 10
1 OVERVIEW
MELSOFT
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
This manual describes the system configuration, screen makeup, basic dialog box
1
operation methods, specifications, help using methods, functions and others of the
following products used with the GOT900 series.
• SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package

• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package
• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV software package
Exclusive updating products which can be utilized by those who use the previous
products.
In this manual, the above products are abbreviated to the following.

SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E ...........................................................GT Works Version5
SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE/SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV.............GT Designer Version5
POINT
This manual describes only the basic operation methods, specifications and
functions.
Refer to the help of the corresponding software package for information on setting
details and operation methods (e.g. figure drawing for monitor screen creation,
object function setting operation, data transfer to the GOT).
Refer to Chapter 5 for how to use help.
1-1
1 OVERVIEW
MELSOFT
MEMO
1
1-2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen
2.1.1 System configuration
GT Works Version5
GT Designer Version5
IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible
2.1.2 Operation environment
Item Description
R R
Pentium 133MHz or higher (Pentium II 266MHz or higher recommended)
R R R
Personal computer on which Microsoft Windows 95 operating system, Microsoft
Body R R R
Windows 98 operating system or Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation 4.0 operating
system operates
Disk drive CD-ROM drive is mandatory.
Main memory 64 Mbyte or more is recommended.
Standard installation:
When installed : 80M bytes or more
When operating : 50M bytes or more
Hard disk space
Compact installation:
When installed : 45M bytes or more
When operating : 50M bytes or more
R R R
CRT Compatible with Windows 95, Windows 98, WindowsNT 4.0
Display colors 256 colors
Resolution Resolution of 800 × 600 dots or more
Mouse, keyboard, printer, R R R R
Compatible with Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, WindowsNT 4.0
CD-ROM drive
POINT
Depending on the language of your Operating System, this software may not start.
In such a case, start this software after setting the Regional Settings within Control
Panel of Windows 95, Windows 98, WindowsNT 4.0 to "English".
R R R
2-1
MELSOFT
2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation
2.2.1 System configuration
(1) When the GOT-A900 is used
2
1
RS-232C cable GOT-A900 Series
2
OS program and monitoring screen data
can be transferred (written) on the
PC card.
PC card with PCMCIA

Ver. 2.1
GT Works Version5
Printer cable Windows R 95, Windows R 98,

WindowsNT R 4.0 compatible
printer
1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2: Refer to Item 2.2.3 for available PC cards.
2-2
MELSOFT
(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used
RS-232C cable GOT-F900 series
Printer cable Windows R 95, Windows R 98,

WindowsNT R 4.0 compatible
printer
GT Works Version5
1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.
2-3
MELSOFT
2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable
The cable in the wiring diagram below or the cable type below is required.
POINT
When the cable is self-made for the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series, either of
the following wiring diagrams (1) and (2) may be used.
However, if the F940GOT/F930GOT is connected to the A series CPU or the FX
series CPU with RS422 to use the PLC CPU and the GOT with the FX-2PIF at the
same time, use the F2-232CAB-1 connection cable.
(1) Wiring diagram of AC30R2-9SS

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible GOT
RXD 2 2 RXD
TXD 3 3 TXD
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
SG 5 5 SG
DTR 4 4 DTR
Shield
(2) Wiring diagram of FX-232CAB-1

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible GOT
RXD 2 2 RXD
TXD 3 3 TXD
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
SG 5 5 SG
DTR 4 4 DTR
Shield
Use the screw-in type connector (inch) for the GOT side.
AC30R2-9SS
IBM PC/AT FX-232CAB-1
or GOT
100% compatible
Manufacturer Type
AC30R2-9SS (9pin-9pin)
Mitsubishi Electric
FX-232CAB-1 (9pin-9pin)
If the following cable is used, 9-25 pin converter is required.
Manufacturer Type
AC30R2-9P (9pin-25pin)
Mitsubishi Electric
F2-232CAB-1 (9pin-25pin)
2-4
MELSOFT
2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
(1) About compatible PC card types

Compatible PC cards are shown below.
Type name Remark

Goods on the market
SRAM type PC card
(PCMCIA Ver.2.1 standard)
A9GTMEM-10MF Memory 16 Mbyte (hardware version D or later), flash PC card formatted
A9GTMEM-20MF Memory 32 Mbyte (hardware version D or later), flash PC card formatted 1
A9GTMEM-40MF Memory 48 Mbyte (hardware version D or later), flash PC card formatted
1: The flash PC card (A9GTMEM-10MF/20MF/40MF) can be used only when the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1: Use the following GOT.

Hardware version A or later of A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD, A975GOT-TBA-
B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA-B, A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-LBA, and
A970GOT-LBD
Hardware version E or later of A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD, A970GOT-TBA,
A970GOT-TBD, A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD, A960GOT-EBA and
A960GOT-EBD
Condition 2: The ROM_BIOS version F or later of the GOT to be used.
(2) About PC card formatting

Use the PC card after formatting.
It may be formatted in either of the following ways.
(a) Using a personal computer
Format the PC card on the personal computer which satisfies the following
conditions.
1) The PCMCIA card slot is provided.
2) Windows 95 or Windows 98 is installed.
R R
(Note that the PC card cannot be formatted by Windows NT 4.0.) R
POINT
Description must be added to config.sys to make Windows recognize the SRAM
type PC card.
For details, type the keyword "SRAM" in the Windows 95 or Windows 98 help
R R
and browse the help.
(b) Using the self-diagnostics (memory card check) of the utility

menu
This method is valid for the SRAM type PC card only.
This method is fewer in the number of object files that may be saved than
the method using the personal computer.
For details of the utility menu, refer to the GOT-A900 Series Operating
Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible Extended •
Option Functions).
2-5
MELSOFT
(3) About the number of files that may be saved

There are the following upper limits to the number of object files that may be
saved according to the memory capacity of the PC card.
Memory Capacity of PC Number of Files

Card Write from GOT 1 Write from personal computer 2
1M 2025 (512) 3
128
2M 4075 (512) 3
4M 256 2041 (2048) 3
16M
2541 (4096) 3
(A9GTMEM-10MF)
32M
512 9740 (2048) 3
(A9GTMEM-20MF)
48M
19497 (2048) 3
(A9GTMEM-40MF)
1 The values in the above table are the maximum numbers of files when the GOT saves
data onto the PC card with such functions as recipe, alarm history save into memory,
hardcopy (PC card), report and screen copy (built-in to memory card).
2 The values in the above table are the maximum numbers of files when screen data are
written to the PC card on GT Designer. (Depends on the saved file capacity. Refer to
the following 3.)
3 Indicates the "maximum number of data written to a file (file unit size)".
For instance, data of 3072 bytes written to the above 4M PC card occupies two files
since that data is greater than the file unit size (2048). As a result, the remaining
number of files that may be written is 2039.
2-6
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT
CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools
This section describes screen configuration and various tools.

(1) Title bar (2) Menu bar
(12) Help
(4) Toolbar (Main)
(5) Toolbar (View)

3
(6) Toolbar
(Figure . Object)
(7) Toolbar (Edit)
(1) Title bar
(10) Template
(11) Tool palette
(8) Toolbar (Draw)
(9) Status bar
(3) Drop-down menu
3-1
MELSOFT
(1) Title bar

The screen title is displayed.
Move the cursor to the title bar. You can drag the screen to the desired position.
The GT Designer has the application window title bar and the screen title bar.
The title is displayed. The screen enlarges or shrinks.
The screen size can be changed or the The screen can be minimized.
screen can be closed.
Click here to close
3 the screen.
(2) Menu bar

Menu names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.
Select a menu and a dropdown menu appears. Then, various functions can be
selected from this menu.
(3) Dropdown menu

Function names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.
If " " is displayed at the right end of the dropdown menu, subsequent dropdown
menu of the function is displayed.
If "..." is displayed on the function name, move the cursor to the function and click
it. The set dialog box appears.
Dropdown menu
is displayed.
Select this and the

dialog box appears.
3-2
MELSOFT
(4) Toolbar (Main)

This is where the basic items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons. Move
the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20)
Names of tool buttons

1) New project 11) Switching edit screen
2) Open project 12) Open and display closed screen (for
3) Save project switching edit screen)
4) New screen 13) Object list screen display
5) Load screen 14) Device list screen display
6) Save screen 15) Comment edit
7) Cut 16) Tool palette display
8) Copy 17) Template display
9) Paste 18) Panelkit display
10) Preview 19) Figure and object editing cursor
20) Template placing cursor
(5) Toolbar (View)

This is where the items (moving distance, pattern, etc.) assigned on the menu
bar appear as buttons.
Moving the cursor onto " " and clicking it opens the drop-down menu of the
corresponding item.
Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the
corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)
1) Setting cursor moving distance 6) Setting screen display data (object

2) Enlarging screen ID, device)
3) Setting grid color 7) Setting screen background color
4) Grid distance 8) Setting screen background color
5) Switching ON/OFF object functions pattern
9) Setting screen color pattern
10) Switching screen-drawn target
(GOT-F900 series only)
3-3
MELSOFT
(6) Toolbar (Figure • Object)

This is where the figure/object setting items laid out in the tool palette appear as
buttons.
Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding
function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30)

1) Line 16) Clock display function
2) Line freedom 17) Comment display function
3) Rectangle 18) Alarm history display function
4) Polygon 19) Alarm list display function
5) Circle 20) Part display function
6) Arc 21) Part movement display function
7) Sector 22) Lamp display function
8) Scale 23) Panel meter display function
9) Text 24) Line/trend/bar graph display function
10) Paint 25) Statistics graph display function
11) Insert BMP format file 26) Scatter chart display function
12) Insert DXF format file 27) Level display function
13) Numerical display function 28) Touch key function
14) Data list display function 29) Numerical input function
15) ASCII display function 30) ASCII input function
(7) Toolbar (Edit)

This is where the figure editing items assigned on the menu bar appear as
buttons.
Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding
function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19)

1) Bring to front 11) Selection target (object)
2) Send to back 12) Selection target (figure+object)
3) Grouping 13) Selection target (report line)
4) Canceling grouping 14) Report figure (line)
5) Horizontal flip 15) Report figure (text)
6) Vertical flip 16) Report print object (numerical)
7) 90° counterclockwise 17) Report print object (comment)
8) Edit vertex 18) Setting report header line
9) Align 19) Setting report repeat line
10) Selection target (figure)
3-4
MELSOFT
(8) Toolbar (Draw)

This is where the items (line style, pattern, text style, etc.) laid out in the tool
palette appear as lists.
Moving the cursor " " onto any button and clicking it opens the drop-down menu
of the corresponding item.
Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the
corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) Set/change of line style 6) Set/change of painting background

2) Set/change of line width color
3) Set/change of line color 7) Set/change of character color
4) Set/change of painting pattern 8) Set/change of character decoration
5) Set/change of painting color 9) Set/change of character shade color
(9) Status bar

This is where the current operation status and cursor coordinates are displayed.
Current operation status is displayed. Cursor coordinates

are displayed.
(10) Template
This is provided to register and read the panelkit and parts easily.
Refer to Section 3.4 for details.
(11) Tool palette

This is where the buttons for setting figures, objects and so on are displayed.
(12) Help
This is where how to operate GT Designer, how to create/edit the GOT screen
data, and other information are shown.
3-5
MELSOFT
3.2 Menu Configuration
This section describes the command list allocated on the menu bar and explains the
details.
(1) GT Designer
Project New !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! New project data is created.
Open !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Existing file is read.
Close !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is closed.
Save !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is saved with project data.
Save as !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is saved as different name and editing continues.
Import File
Project !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Other project data is used for the project data in editing.
Bitmap !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! BMP format figure data is pasted on the screen.
Dxf !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! DXF format figure data is pasted on the screen.
GPP Comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! GX Developer device comment file to be read into the GT Designer is specified.
Print !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Setting data and screen image is output to printer and files.
Option !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation, display and communication environments are set.
Exit !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! GT Designer is ended.
Edit Undo !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The last operation for the data is cancelled and the previous data is maintained.
Cut !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects are cut and stored in the clipboard.
Copy !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures, characters and objects are stored in the clipboard.
Paste !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects stored in the clipboard are pasted.
Consecutive Copy !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are copied and pasted on the multiple editing screen.
Delete !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are deleted.
Edit Vertex !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Length of continuous line or lines designated by polygon is changed.
Object of Selection
Figure !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Only figures are edited.
Object !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Only objects are edited.
Figure and Object !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects are edited.
Report line !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Report lines are edited.
Select All !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! All figures and objects are selected.
Group
Group !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are grouped.
Switch group !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Grouping of selected objects as a single object.
Ungroup !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Grouping of selected figures and objects is canceled.
Rotate/Flip
Flip Vertical !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are flipped vertically.
Flip Horizontal !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are flipped horizontally.
Rotate Left !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are rotated to the left by 90°.
Align !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are aligned.
Stacking Order
Bring to Front !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are brought to front.
Send to Back !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are sent to back.
Attribute !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Attributes of selected figures and objects are changed.
Replace Devics !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The set monitoring devices are replaced with other devices.
View Preview !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen details are displayed in monitoring image.

ON Image !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen details are displayed in ON.
Redisplay !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is re-displayed.
Color Setting !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 16 colors that are displayed on the color list are selected.
Device List
Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays the device list used for each screen.
Project !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays the device list used for each project.
Object List !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Object list set in the screen is displayed.
Option !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation, display and communication environments are set.
3-6
MELSOFT
Draw Panelkit !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Reads, registers and deletes the panel kit.

Part !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers the part for the part display function and the part movement function.
Comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers the comment for the comment display function, the alarm list display function
and the alarm history display function.
Draw Figure
Line !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws linear line.
Line Freeform !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws a continuous linear line.
Rectangle !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws a rectangle.
Polygon !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws a polygon.
Circle !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Draws a circle.
Arc/Sector !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws an arc/sector.
Scale !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Draws graduation.
Text !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Inputs characters.
Paint !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Paints a polygon or a closed area with selected pattern.
Data Display
Numerical Display !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the numerical display function.
Data List !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the data list display function.
Ascii Display !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the ASCII display function.
Clock !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the clock display function.
Message Display
Comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the comment display function.
Alarm History !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the alarm history display function.
Alarm List !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the alarm list display function.
Animation Display
Part Display !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the part display function.
Part Movement !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the part movement function.
Part Move Route !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the part movement route.
Lamp !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the lamp display function.
Panelmeter !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the panel meter function.
Graph
Trend/Line/Bar !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the trend graph display function, the line graph display function and the bar graph
display function.
Statistics !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the statistical graph function.
Scatter chart!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the scatter chart display function.
Level !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the level function.
Touch Key !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the touch key function.
Data Input
Numerical Input !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the numerical input function.
Ascii Input !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the ASCII input function.
Overlap Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the overlap screen function.
Window Position
Overlap Window 1 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the window screen position for overlap window 1.
Overlap Window 2 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the window screen position for overlap window 2.
Superimpose Window !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the window screen position for superimpose window.
Key Window !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the key window position.
Key Window Custom
Input Value Area !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the input value display area in the key window.
Input Range Area !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the input range display area in the key window.
Report Common !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Makes settings for the whole report function.
Parameter !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the parameters of each report screen.
Print Object
Number !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the value to be printed.
Comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the comment to be printed.
Line !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws the rules (rectangle).
Text !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Enters characters.
Header/Continue !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Specifies the header and repeated lines.
3-7
MELSOFT
Communi- Download (to GOT)

cation Monitor Data !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Downloads the created monitoring screen data to the GOT or the PC card.
Special Function Data !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Downloads the special Function monitoring data to the GOT or the PC card.
Upload (from GOT) !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Uploads the monitoring data stored in the GOT.
Install
OS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Installs the OS on the GOT or the PC card.
ROM_BIOS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Installs the ROM_BIOS on the GOT or the PC card.
Memory !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays or clears the memory.
Data Check !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Checks the number of monitoring data.
Option !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation, display and communication environments are set.
Common Title
Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the titles and details for each base screen, window screen and report screen.
Project !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers the title and the ID number of the project data.
Switching Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the base/window screen switching device.
Switching Station No. !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the station No. switching device.
Password !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the security function (password, etc.).
Hardcopy !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the hard copy function.
Operation Panel !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the operation panel function.
Barcode !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the bar code function.
Sampling !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the sampling function.
System Information !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the device to check the GOT operation status on the PLC CPU.
Time action !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the time action function.
Observe Status !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the status monitoring function.
Alarm History !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the alarm history function in common with projects.
Floating Alarm !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the alarm flow Alarm.
Recipe !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the recipe function in common with projects.
Print Format !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the print format used on the alarm history display function.
Sound !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the voice file (WAV format).
GOT/PC Type !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the GOT type for the created screen data and the PC type for connection.
Script
Project script setting!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Make project-based script setting.
Screen script setting !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Make screen-based script setting.
Key Window Screen No. !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the screen used as a key window.
Auxiliary Setting
Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Performs auxiliary setting for each screen.
Project !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Performs auxiliary setting for each project.
Screen New Screen !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! New screen is created.

Load !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Designated screen is opened.
Clear !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Designated screen is closed.
Clear and Load !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is closed and another screen is opened.
Store !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is saved and editing continues.
Store As !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen No. is changed.
Screen Utilize/Delete !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen data is utilized/deleted in the editing project.
Change Size !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen size is changed.
Cascade !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The current screens are displayed in cascade.
Tile !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The current screens are displayed in tile.
Help Update !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Help which allows you to browse the updated additional function list.
Firstly !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Fist operation help learned in the step of GT Designer.
Figure !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for drawing figures.
Object !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for setting objects.
Transfer/Print !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for data transmission and printing.
About !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Version of installed GT Designer is displayed.
3-8
MELSOFT
(2) GT Converter
Project Open !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Designates the monitor screen data for GOT800 to be converted.
Option
Conversion setting !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Set conversion options for converting Digital's package data into
GOT900 series data.
Folder of GT Designer !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Designates the folder having the execution file of the GT Designer
to be started.
Execute GT Designer!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Starts the GT Designer.
Exit !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Ends the data GT Converter.
Start Conversion !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Executes the conversion of the monitor screen data for GOT900.
Screen Log display !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Displays the result of conversion to the monitor screen data for GOT900.
Help Help topics !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Operation help for the GT Converter.
About !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Displays the software version of the installed GT Converter.
(3) GT Debugger
File Open !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Opens the debugging file.
Close !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Closes the debugging file.
Save !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Saves the debugging file.
Save As !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Saves the current debugging file and editing continues.
Exit !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ends the GT Debugger.
Communication Start !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Starts communication with the GOT.

End !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ends communication with the GOT.
Setting Registration Device !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers device for debugging.

Delete Device !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Deletes registered device from device registration.
Option !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the communication port and the communication speed.
Help Reference topics !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for GT Debugger.

About !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays software version of installed GT Debugger.
(4) GT Manager
Project Execute !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Starts GT Designer.
Renumber !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Changes the drawing data screen number.
Delete !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! .Deletes the drawing data.
Exit !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ends the GT Manager.
Edit Cut !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Cuts the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.
Copy !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copies the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.
Paste !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Pastes the drawing data stored in the clipboard.
Help Reference topics !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help of GT Manager.

About !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays software version of installed GT Manager.
3-9
MELSOFT
3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box
(1) Tab
(2) Command button
(3) List box
(4) Check box
(5) Radio button
(6) Text box
(7) Spin box
3 - 10
MELSOFT
(1) Tab
To change the tab, click ( ) where the setting item is displayed.
(2) Command button

OK or Cancel is available for the command button. Click the appropriate
button for execution.
(3) List box

Click to display the list for selection and click the desired item.
(4) Check box

To execute the item, click to put mark.
(5) Radio button

Click for the desired item.
(6) Text box

Input characters from the keyboard.
(7) Spin box

There are two cases; one is direct input of the value and the other is changing
the value by clicking . To input the value directly, click the spin box and
input the value from the keyboard.
To change the value by clicking , click and the value increases. Click
and the value decreases.
3 - 11
MELSOFT
3.4 Operation of Template
POINT
In the template function, Mitsubishi Electric Corp. owns the copyright for design
of all parts, including 256 color BMP parts provided with the GT Designer.
Use of these parts is strictly prohibited for the purpose other than the GOT.
In the template function, figures or objects can be easily registered or pasted on the
screen as parts (panelkit, parts).
A template has parts display area and tree display area.
(1) Parts/tree display area

(a) Parts display area
This displays parts (panelkit, parts) in the library registered in each folder
(parts library, panelkit, parts).
1) 3) 4) 5)
2) 6)
7)
8)
1) Displays the library name.

2) Click this to display or not display the panelkit name and the parts name.
3) Click this to delete the selected panelkit or parts.
4) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected
panelkit or parts.
5) Select the figure or the object on the screen, and click it. It is then
registered in the library as a panelkit or part.
6) Click this and the tree display area of the template appears.
7) Panelkit or parts are displayed.
8) Panelkit name or parts names are displayed.
POINTS
• Panelkit in the part library folder cannot be deleted and their attributes cannot
be changed.
• Panelkit cannot be registered in the part library folder.
3 - 12
MELSOFT
(b) Tree display area

The library where the panelkit or parts on the parts display area is
registered is displayed.
1) 2) 3)
4)
5)
7)
6)
8)
1) Click this to create the library of the panelkit folder.

Up to 50 libraries can be created.
2) Click this to delete the library of the selected panelkit folder.
3) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected
panelkit folder library.
4) Parts (not changed by user) provided by the GT Designer are registered.
Some parts in the parts library folder show objects and others show
figures only. Reading and pasting of these parts allow easy setting of
lamp figure or switch figure.
5) Figures and objects drawn by a user can be registered as panelkit.
6) A figure registered by a user can be registered as a part.
Parts registered in this step are used in the parts display function and
the parts movement function.
7) Displays the library.
8) Click this to close the tree display area.
POINT
Only the panelkit folder library is used for creation, deletion and change of
attribute.
3 - 13
MELSOFT
(2) Pasting method of parts

1) Bring up the tree display area and double
click the name where the panelkit or parts for
pasting is registered.
2) Click the desired panelkit or part on the parts

display area.
3) Move the cursor to the position of pasting and

click the mouse. The part is then pasted.
4) Perform either of the following operations:
<Continue pasting>
1) Hold down the [Ctrl] key and press the [C] key
( Ctrl C ).
2) Holding down the [Ctrl] key and pressing the
[V] key pastes the part ( Ctrl V ). Drag
and move it to the pasting position.
You can continue pasting by repeating the
operations in step 2) and later.
<Change the attribute>
Right-click and click the [Attribute] menu.
3 - 14
MELSOFT
3.5 Operation of Tool Palette
Click each button to draw figures or to set objects.

Line attributes or figure painting pattern can be selected from the list box.
(Tool palette for GOT-A900 series) (Tool palette for GOT-F900 series)
(1) Cursor button
1) 2) 3) 4)
1) Panelkit 3) Cursor for placing template

2) Cursor for editing figure and object 4) Cursor for editing report range
(2) Figure drawing button
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)
1) Line 8) Scale
2) Line Freeform 9) Text
3) Rectangle 10) Paint
4) Polygon 11) Report figure (line)
5) Circle 12) Report figure (text)
6) Arc 13) Insert BMP format file
7) Sector 14) Insert DXF format file
3 - 15
MELSOFT
(3) Object setting button
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)
11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22)
1) Numerical display function 12) Trend/Line/Bar graph display

2) Data list display function function
3) ASCII display function 13) Statistics graph display function
4) Clock display function 14) Scatter chart display function
5) Comment display function 15) Level display function
6) Alarm history display function 16) Touch key function
7) Alarm list display function 17) Numerical input function
8) Part display function 18) ASCII input function
9) Part movement display function 19) Print object (numerical) function
10) Lamp display function 20) Print object (comment) function
11) Panelmeter display function 21) Setting report header line
22) Setting report repeat line
(4) Attribute setting list box
1) 2) 3)
4) 5) 6)
7) 8) 9)
1) Set/change of line style 6) Set/change of painting background

2) Set/change of line width color
3) Set/change of line color 7) Set/change of character color
4) Set/change of painting pattern 8) Set/change of character decoration
5) Set/change of painting color 9) Set/change of character shade
color
3 - 16
MELSOFT
3.6 How to Use Help
Help is installed together with the corresponding software of GT Designer Version5.

Help includes not only how to operate the corresponding software but also GOT
screen data creating/editing methods and other information.
Example: When checking the [Numeral] item of the Numerical Display dialog box
(Basic tab setting)
<GT Designer setting dialog box>
Check
[Numeral] item.
1) Enter keyword.
Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item

list appears.
2) Choose display item from Topics Found.

3) If there are multiple [Numeral] items in
Topics Found, those multiple candidates
appear.
Here, choose "Numeral" in
[Numerical Display] dialog box.
4) Display
3 - 17
MELSOFT
3.6.1 Help menu makeup
The help menu is made up as described below.

(1) GT Designer help
Update..................................Lists the additional functions made available by
updating GT Designer to Version5.
Firstly....................................Describes the screen and project operations and
common setting items.
Figure ...................................Describes figure drawing and editing operations.
Object ...................................Describes object setting and editing operations.
Transfer/Print .......................Describes information required for data transfer and
download/upload operations.
About ....................................Describes the version information of GT Designer.
(2) GT Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager help

Reference topics ..................Describes operations for GT Converter/GT
Debugger/GT Manager.
About ....................................Describes the version information of GT
Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager.
3.6.2 Printing the help screen
(1) Printing from the contents

Click or of the item to be printed to make selection, and click the Print
button.
(2) Printing the current topic

Click the Print button.
3 - 18
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION
(1) Table at top right of each section

The table at top right of each section indicates the following meanings.
GOT Type
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
: Function available, : Function unavailable
4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created
When the GOT-A900 series is used, the base screen, window screen (two display
methods: overlap window and superimpose window) and report screen are created.
4
When the GOT-F900 series is used, the base screen and key window screen (display
method: overlap window) can be created.
Close key Movement key window screen
Touch the close key of the overlap

window screen and the overlap
window closes. To move the overlap window
screen, touch the movement
key and then touch the desired
position for movement.
Base screen
4.1.1 Base screen
This screen is the basic display of the GOT. Each screen operates as an individual
screen.
Max. Number of Registerable

GOT Type A (Dots) B (Dots)
Screens Screen Number
A985GOT 800 600
A975GOT/
Base screen B 480
A970GOT 640 4096 1 to 32767
A960GOT 400
A95 GOT 320 240
A F940GOT 320 240
500 1 to 500
F930GOT 240 80
4-1
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.1.2 Window screen
POINT
The GOT-F900 series (except the F930GOT) allows only the key window to be
created.
There are 2 window screens; the overlap window that pops up on the base screen, and
the superimpose window that compose contents.
Up to 1024 window screens can be created. (Screen numbers can be registered from
1 to 32767.)
(1) Setting range of screen size

When using A985GOT: Maximum Width 800 × Length 480 dots
When the using A97 /960GOT: Maximum Width 640 × Length 400 dots
4 When the using A95 GOT: Maximum Width 320 x Length 240 dots
When the using GOT-F900 Series: Maximum Width 318 x Length 220 dots
Minimum Width 94 × Length 81 dots
Base Screen
For the overlap window, the above values indicate the maximum setting range
applicable when the close and move keys are hidden.
When the close and move keys are displayed, the maximum setting range is as
follows.
When using A985GOT: Maximum width 798 × length 463 dots
When using A97 /960GOT: Maximum width 638 × length 383 dots
When using A95 GOT: Maximum width 318 × length 223 dots
Setting range for the width : Minimum 94 dots - Maximum 800 dots
Setting range for the length : Minimum 81 dots - Maximum 480 dots
POINT
The initial value of the window screen size is set as follows:
• When using model other than A95 GOT: Width 318 × Length 176 dots
• When using A95 GOT: Width 190 × Length 126 dots
4-2
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(2) Display method of window screen

A window screen with the value stored in the window switching device is
displayed at the designated display position.
(Set the display position by directly specifying it. Alternatively, it may be specified
by the value of the specified device. (Overlap window only))
The window screen is closed when you touch the close button (overlap window
only) or the window switching device turns to "0".
(Ex.) Overlap window 1

Screen switching device = 3
Overlap window 1 display position
Window screen 3
Overlap window is displayed at the left top of the window position.
(3) Movement of window screen (Overlap window only)

Touch the movement bar on the window screen to go into the movement mode.
Touch the movement bar again at the desired position for movement.
Movement key area
Touch the movement key area of the window The window screen moves to the desired
screen. position where touched.
4-3
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(4) Overlap window

(a) Display type of overlap window
The overlap window has a close (close screen) and a move bar (move
screen) bar to perform manual window operation.
You can make setting to display or hide these close key and move bar.
<Close and move keys displayed> <Close and move keys hidden>
Overlap window screen Overlap window screen
Screen can be moved or Screen cannot be moved.

closed manually. Set screen switching device
value to close.
(b) When overlap windows are overlaid

Two overlap windows can be displayed together.
When two windows are overlaid, touch the lower hidden window to bring it
up.
Overlap window 2 Overlap window 2

Overlap window 1 Overlap wind
Touch the lower hidden window screen. The lower window comes up.
(c) Relationships between overlap windows and touch keys

Touch keys are invalid around overlap windows in the area equivalent to
one key (16 dots).
Therefore, note that touch keys hidden under the overlap windows are
invalid if pressed.
: Valid touch key area

Overlap window 1 : Invalid touch key area
Overlap window 2
Single key-equivalent
touch key invalid areas
4-4
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
The surrounding single key (16 dots)-equivalent touch key invalid areas
may be eliminated only when the following conditions are satisfied.
• The close and move keys are set to be hidden.
• The window size is set to a multiple of 16 dots.
: Valid touch key area
Overlap window 1 : Invalid touch key area
Overlap window 2
(5) Superimpose window

Retrieve one window screen on the base screen for composition. It can be used
as part of the base screen.
While the superimpose window is displayed, changing the window screen
number can change the part of the base screen dynamically.
(Ex. 1) Add color to line A where abnormality has occurred.

Operation for abnormality in line A Store 3 in the screen switching device
Figure of window screen number 3
A Current
production
quantity:300
B Current
production quantity:256
Set "3" in the screen switching device

Abnormality
of the superimpose window.
A Abnormality
B Current
production quantity:256
POINT
Note that the touch key underneath the overlap window does not function properly.
4-5
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(Ex. 2) Switch the display method of manufacturing quantity with buttons.

Button A Display the window screen of screen number 1
Operation of each button Button B Display the window screen of screen number 5
Button C Display the window screen of screen number 10
A Superimpose window
display position
Main screen B
C
Window screen Numerical display Graph display Statistical display

Window screen number 1 5 10
Current production Current production Current production
quantity quantity quantity
A line 135Unit
Screen B line 89Unit
C line 106Unit
A B C
1) Touch button A to display window screen 1.
Current production
quantity Current production
A A
quantity
A line 135Unit
B + B line 89Unit = B
A line 135Unit
B line 89Unit
C C line 106Unit
C C line 106Unit
2) Touch button B to display window screen 5.
Current production Current production

quantity quantity
A A
B + = B
C C
A B C A B C
3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.
Current production
Current production
quantity
quantity
A A
B + = B
C C
4-6
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(Ex. 3) Switch the display/non-display of buttons for additional product option

parts.
Button A Display the window screen of screen number 3
Operation of each button Button B Display the window screen of screen number 7
Button C Display the window screen of screen number 10
Superimpose window display position
The added options are available.
Name
A B
A C
Main screen B
C
Window screen Options of product A Options of product B Options of product C

Window screen number 3 7 10
D D
E F F
Screen
G G H H
I I J
1) Touch button A to display window screen 3.

Name The added options are available.
A B Name
A C D A
A B
C D
B + E F
=
G B E F
C G
I
C I
2) Touch button B to display window screen 7.

A B Name
A A B
C A C
B + =
G H
B
C G H
I J C I J
3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.

A B Name
A A B
C D A C D
B + F
=
H
B F
C H
C
4-7
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(6) Precautions for display of the superimpose window screen

If the superimpose window screen overlaps the base screen, be careful for the
following points:
(a) Contents of each screen overlaps
1) Figure data
Figures of superimpose window screen are brought to front.
+
Superimpose window
screen
Base screen Screen display
2) Object data
The object with changed values out of objects in the base screen and
the Superimpose Window screen is brought to front.
12345 12345
000001
+ 000001
Superimpose window
Base screen screen Screen display
When the value of the object
changes, the object with changed
value is brought to front.
3) Touch key
The touch key of the superimpose window screen is brought to front.
If the touch keys overlap, both touch key functions of the base screen
and the superimpose window screen become effective when touched.
+
Superimpose window
Base screen screen Screen display
POINT
If the touch keys of the superimpose window screen and the base screen overlap
and the touch keys are briefly touched, only the touch key of the superimpose
window screen may function.
4-8
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(b) If the superimpose window screen is displayed out of the base

screen
With the reference point "+" at the upper left for the superimpose window
screen, the limited area can be displayed on the base screen.
+
Superimpose window
Base screen screen
Screen display
(not displayed for touch key)
(c) If only one object that can be displayed in one screen overlaps
If only one object, such as data list or alarm list, that can be displayed in
one screen overlaps, the objects can be displayed for the number of
screens. However, the functions are limited and the display may not be
correct.
4-9
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.1.3 About the report screen
POINT
The A950 handy GOT / GOT-F900 series has no report screens.
The report screen is used to set the format and layout of data printed by a printer with
the report function of the GOT.
Hence, only the functions usable with the report function may be set on this screen.
For details of the report function, refer to Section 6.7.
(1) Screen size setting range
Left
Item Setting Range
space
lines 1 to 127
Format
Top columns 1 to 255
space
Top space 0 to 30
Report screen lines Margins
Left space 0 to 254
Number of screens 1 to 8
columns
(2) Setting for each printer

The screen size (print format settings) of the report screen must be changed
according to the printable area of the printer.
You can use the following expressions to find the settings.
For more information on the print format settings, refer to the GT Designer Help.
• To find the maximum setting of the columns + left space (width)

(Printable area width of printer [mm]) ÷ 25.4 × 15
Example) Printable area width of printer is "204mm"

204 ÷ 25.4 × 15 = 120.47…
Hence, set the columns + left space to within 120 in the GOT print
format setting.
• To find the maximum setting of the lines + top space (height)

(Printable area height of printer [mm]) ÷ 4.23
Example) Printable area height of printer is "280mm"

280 ÷ 4.23 = 66.19…
Hence, set the lines + top space to within 66 in the GOT print format
setting.
POINT
The printable area of the printer changes with the printer used.
For details of the specifications, refer to the instruction manual of the printer used.
4 - 10
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes
4.2.1 Types of drawing figures
Figures and character types are as follows:
(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Figures Example of drawing Attributes for selection
Line
Line style, line width, line color

Line Freedom
Rectangle
Line style, line width, line color,

Polygon painting pattern, painting color,
painting background
Circle (ellipse)
Arc (ellipse arc) Line style, line width, line color
Line style, line width, line color,

Sector painting pattern, painting color,
painting background
Painting of enclosed Painting pattern, painting color,

area painting background
Figure data in
bitmap / DXF 
format
Style, text color, solid color, size,

ABC ABC A BC vertical, direction, alignment, high
Text A quality font (high quality font only for
B ABC multiple of 2, 4, 6 and 8 of length to
C width magnification)
Number of graduation, direction,
Scale centerline, line style, line width, line
color
Report figure (line)


Report figure(text) ABC
4 - 11
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Figures Example of drawing Attributes for selection
Line Line style, line color
Rectangle
Line style, painting pattern, painting
color
Circle
Figure data in
bitmap / DXF 
format
Text ABC ABC A BC Text color, size, alignment
4 - 12
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.2.2 Attribute type for selection
Attribute types for drawing are as follows:

Attribute Example of drawing
Full line , Broken line , Dotted line ,
Line style Alternate long and short dash line , Alternate long and two short dash line
1 dot , 2 dot , 3 dot ,

Line width 4 dot , 5 dot , 7 dot
256 colors
Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is
compatible with 256 color display.
Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is
Display color
Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is
All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a
monochrome display.
Painting
pattern
256 colors
Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is
Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is
Painting color,
painting
Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is
background
color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a
monochrome display.
4 - 13
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Attribute Example of drawing
Full line , Broken line , Dotted line ,
Line style Alternate long and short dash line , Alternate long and two short dash line
Line width 1 dot
256 colors
F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 8 colors.
F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)
Display color All colors other than black are displayed in the same
Display on GOT
color (white).
F930GOT-BWD-E(Blue liquid crystal)
color (white), and black is displayed in blue.
Painting
pattern
256 colors
F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 8 colors.
F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)
Painting color All colors other than black are displayed in the same
Display on GOT
color (white).
F930GOT-BWD-E(Blue liquid crystal)
color (white), and black is displayed in blue.
4 - 14
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format

Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-A900 series are 3 types; 256
colors, 16 colors and black-and-white.
There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they
are displayed in reduced colors.
(Ex.)
• 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 16 color/black-and-white
GOT-A900 series.
• 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the black-and-white GOT-
A900 series.

Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-F900 series are 2 types; 16
colors and black-and-white.
There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they
are displayed in reduced colors.
(Ex.)
• 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/
white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.
• 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/
white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.
4 - 15
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.2.4 Character size by magnification

Length × Width (dot)
Length
magnification
× 0.5 ×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6 ×7 ×8
Width
magnification
× 0.5 8×8 8 × 16 8 × 32 8 × 48 8 × 64 8 × 80 8 × 96 8 × 112 8 × 128
×1 16 × 8 16 × 16 16 × 32 16 × 48 16 × 64 16 × 80 16 × 96 16 × 112 16 × 128
×2 32 × 8 32 × 16 32 × 32 32 × 48 32 × 64 32 × 80 32 × 96 32 × 112 32 × 128
×3 48 × 8 48 × 16 48 × 32 48 × 48 48 × 64 48 × 80 48 × 96 48 × 112 48 × 128
×4 64 × 8 64 × 16 64 × 32 64 × 48 64 × 64 64 × 80 64 × 96 64 × 112 64 × 128
×5 80 × 8 80 × 16 80 × 32 80 × 48 80 × 64 80 × 80 80 × 96 80 × 112 80 × 128
×6 96 × 8 96 × 16 96 × 32 96 × 48 96 × 64 96 × 80 96 × 96 96 × 112 96 × 128
×7 112 × 8 112 × 16 112 × 32 112 × 48 112 × 64 112 × 80 112 × 96 112 × 112 112 × 128
×8 128 × 8 128 × 16 128 × 32 128 × 48 128 × 64 128 × 80 128 × 96 128 × 112 128 × 128
REMARKS
• Set the character magnification for both length and width to the multiple of 2, 4,
6 and 8 if high quality font is used.
• If a part with high quality font is displayed with the part display/part movement
display function on the screen which is not using high quality font, the part is
not displayed in high quality font.
When any of characters on the screen are changed to high quality font, the part
is displayed in high quality font.

Length × Width (dot)
Length
magnification
×1 ×2 ×3 ×4
Width
magnification
× 0.5 8 × 16 8 × 32 8 × 48 8 × 64
×1 16 × 16 16 × 32 16 × 48 16 × 64
×2 32 × 16 32 × 32 32 × 48 32 × 64
×3 48 × 16 48 × 32 48 × 48 48 × 64
×4 64 × 16 64 × 32 64 × 48 64 × 64
4 - 16
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure
Memory capacity of figures and characters for drawing is as follows.

The following memory capacity applies to figures regardless of attribute types and
sizes.

Figure Memory capacity (byte)
Line 20
16 + 4 × n
Line Freedom
n is the number of vertexes.
Rectangle 24
16 + 4 × n
Polygon n is the number of vertexes.
(Start and end points are counted as one of vertexes.)
Circle (ellipse) 24
Arc (ellipse arc) 32
Sector 36
Painting of enclosed area 16
Figure data in bitmap file
20 + data capacity of bitmap file
format
28 + 2 (n + 1)
n is the number of characters
Text
(memory capacity in the left regardless of 2 byte/1 byte
character)
128 × n
High quality font
n is the number of characters.
Scale 24
Report figure (line) 64 for rules of 32 × 32 dots
Report figure (text) 16 + 4 × (number of characters ÷ 2)

Figure Memory capacity (byte)
Line 20
Rectangle 24
Circle 24
Figure data in bitmap file
20 + data capacity of bitmap file
format
34 + n
Text
n is the number of characters
4 - 17
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions
4.3.1 Types of available object functions
This section explains the object function types.

Refer to Chapter5 for details of the object functions.
: Allowed for setting, : Not allowed for setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Function Details Refer To
series series
Function that displays the data stored in the word device in a numerical value.
Numerical
It can change the display color or the attribute of the value on the monitoring Section 5.1.1
display
device when reaching a certain value.
Function that displays the status of multiple word devices in numerical values on
Data list the table.
display Designation of one row out of 5 rows maximum as a sort key allows sorting of Section 5.1.2
display according to the set priority.
Function that displays character strings, acknowledging data stored continuously
ASCII display Section 5.1.3
in the word device as character code (ASCII code).
Function that displays the clock data of the PLC CPU.
Clock display (When the GOT-F900 series is used, the clock data of the GOT is displayed.) Section 5.1.4
This can be displayed in the form of time/date.
Function that displays comments in relation to the bit device ON/OFF and the
Comment
designated range of the word device. Section 5.2.1
display
Comment can be displayed in multiple lines for the display area.
Function that displays the time and the comment of ON status and being in the
Alarm history
designated range in relation to the comment of the ON status of the designated Section 5.2.2
display
bit device and the designated range of the word device.
Alarm list Function that displays a warning for error on PLC CPU, data link/network and Section 5.2.3
display(sys- GOT.
tem alarm)
Alarm list Function that displays comment of the ON bit device in the order of priority in Section 5.2.3
display(user relation to the comments of multiple bit devices.
alarm)
Function that displays the specified part/screen or the part/screen associated
with the ON/OFF of the bit device or the value of the word device. (The function
Part display Section 5.3.1
to display a part on the base screen is available for the GOT-A900 only.)
It can also displays the figure in BMP/DXF file format as a part.
Part Function that displays movement/locus of the part figure with the designated
movement movement method in relation to ON/OFF of the bit device and the value of the Section 5.3.2
display word device.
Function that changes the lamp illumination color according to the value of the
Lamp display Section 5.3.3
device.
Function that displays the value of the word device on the meter with the ratio for
Panel meter the upper/lower limits.
display When the value of the monitoring devices reaches a certain value, the color of Section 5.3.4
the meter panel can be changed.
Function that collects the data stored in the word device at the designated timing
Trend graph
and displays it on the trend graph. When the graph is displayed to the screen Section 5.4.1
display
range, the screen scrolls for further display.
Line graph Function that collects the data of multiple word devices in a batch and displays
Section 5.4.2
display the line graph.
Bar graph Function that displays the data stored in multiple word devices with a bar graph.
Section 5.4.3
display
Statistical Function that collects the data of multiple word devices and displays the
Section 5.4.4
graph display percentage of each word device data in graph.
Scatter chart Function that gathers the data stored in the word devices associated with the X
Section 5.4.5
display and Y axes and displays them as a scatter chart.
Function that displays the word device value in level with the ratio for
Level display Section 5.4.6
upper/lower limits.
4 - 18
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Function Details Refer To
series series
Function that performs bit device ON/OFF, word device value changing, screen
Touch key Section 5.5
switching, etc. according to the touch keys touched.
Numerical Function that inputs the desired value into the designated word device.
Section 5.6.1
input
ASCII input Function that inputs the desired ASCII code into the designated word device. Section 5.6.2
The hardcopy function enables you to capture and print out a GOT monitor
4 3
Hardcopy screen, and save to a PC card using BMP-type data file by setting a bit device to Section 5.8.1
ON/OFF or by touching the touch key set in the Touch key (Extended) settings
4 5 Function that writes the data from the bar code reader into the PLC CPU.
Barcode Section 5.8.8
System Function that checks the GOT operation status with the PLC CPU.
Section 5.8.2
information
Observe Function that writes data to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is
Section 5.8.3
Status enabled (ON/OFF of specified bit device, word device value range designation).
Function that displays the comments of the ON bit device in the order of
Floating Alarm
occurrence from right to left on the base screen in relation to the comments of Section 5.8.4
display
multiple bit devices.
Function that sets the device as a monitoring device, writes the designated data
1
Recipe into the device, saves the designated device range into the memory card, and Section 5.8.5
writes it into the PLC CPU.
2 Function that reproduces the voice file in WAV format and provides a touch
Sound Section 5.8.6
sound on the touch key or sounds in status monitoring function.
2 Function that displays the test window during display of the monitoring screen to
Test Section 5.8.7
change the device value.
Overlap Function that retrieves other screen on the current screen for overlap display.
Section 5.9.1
screen The retrieved screen is displayed in green frames.
Operation Function that allows operation from outside the GOT using an operation panel
Section 5.8.9
panel connected.
Function that gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the
4
Report buffer memory of a special function module, or to print numerical data and Section 5.7
comments associated with bit device ON/OFF.
Function that performs operation, such as device write, at the specified time of Section
Time action
the day of the week. 5.8.10
Function that collects data in the specified cycle or under the bit condition and Section
Sampling
displays them in a graph or the like. 5.8.11
Function that can control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs Section
Script (scripts). 5.8.12
Chapter 7
1 When using the recipe function on the A95 GOT, among the A95 GOTs, use any of the A95 GOT-TBD-M3, A95 GOT-SBD-M3,
A95 GOT-LBD-M3 and A950 handy GOT.
2 Not used on the A95 GOT.
3 Unusable on the F930GOT.
4 Unusable on the A950 handy GOT.
5 Unusable on the F940 handy GOT.
4 - 19
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set
The following indicate the main specifications of the functions.

In the following tables, the maximum setting points and used memory spaces assume
that the setting items are all default values.
When data operation, display method and/or other settings are made to increase the
following memory space, the number of points that can be set may decrease.

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions
Station number changing

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Function setting Used memory space
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Display attributes Others
Range
points per (bytes)

screen
Display format/number of display

digits
Shape, Frame, Plate, Decimal : 1 to 13
Numerical
512 24 Numeral, Blink, Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
Display
Reverse Octal : 1 to 6
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
1 digits
(not Shape, Frame, Plate, Decimal : 1 to 13
Data list 32 + 12 (row + 1) 6
allowed for Title, Color, Rule, Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
display devices
window Reverse Octal : 1 to 6
screen) Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate,
ASCII display 256 8 + Text Digits:1 to 80
Color, Blink, Reverse
Data format
Shape, Frame, Plate, yy/mm/dd
Clock display 2 8
Color dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
12 + 8 registered
• Max. number of comments
comments + (4 + 2
registered: 32767
total characters)
Color, Reverse, Blink, • Max. number of characters set
Comment registered comments
High quality font to 1 comment: 512 characters
(values in ( ) are
(independently of character
converted to the multiple
size)
number of 4.)
Max. number of characters set
Comment Shape, Frame, Size,
256 24 to 1 comment: 512 characters
display Blink
(independently of character size)
1 Max. number of monitor points
(not 80 + (2 title characters Bit Device: 3072
Alarm history Shape, Frame, Plate,
allowed for + 4) display items + Word Device
display Title, Rule
window 16 devices 3 (16 Bit): 1024
screen) (32 Bit): 512
4 - 20
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen
Alarm list
display Shape, Frame, Plate, Max. number of display
1 184
(System Size characters: 60 characters
alarm)
Max. number of monitor points
24
Alarm list Consecutive bit device
(Memory Shape, Frame, Plate,
display 152 + devices 24 : 512 points
saving Size
(User alarm) 3 Random bit device
16) 1
: 255 points
Display mode
(Overwrite/XOR), Type
Part Display 256 44 Positioning (Top- Part/Mark/Base Screen/Window
left/Center), Color, screen
Blink
Movement Mode
(Position/Line/Point),
Part Display mode
Type
Movement 256 60 (Locus/Movement),
Part/Mark
display Positioning (Top-
left/Center), Color,
Blink
Shape (Basic
figure/Free figure),
High quality font,
Lamp
256 24 Frame, Lamp,
display
Background, Pattern,
Blink, Text, Color, V
H
Meter type
1/4 Circle
Needle, Meter panel,
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right
Panel meter Text, Size, Color,
256 40 top/Left top/Left Bottom)
display High quality font,
1/2 Circle
Scale display, Scale
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
points
3/4 Circle, Circle
24 Shape, Frame, Plate,
Trend graph (Memory Scale display, Scale • Max. number of graphs : 8
76 + devices 2
display saving points, Graph, Style, • Max. number of points : 100
3
16) Width
32
(Locus
Line graph Scale display, Scale • Max. number of graphs : 8
Mode: 1 76 + devices 2
display points, Graph, Style, • Max. number of points : 500
per 1 6
Width
Project)
Bar graph
256 220 Graph, Pattern, Max. number of graphs: 8
display
Background
4 - 21
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

No. of Partitions,
Statistical
Direciton, Scale Graph:
graph 32 444
display, Scale points, Rectangle graph/Circle graph
display
Graph, Pattern,
Background
• Graph type:
Sample/batch display
• Number of points that may be
saved into memory: 2000
points (For batch display, the
24 Shape, Frame, Graph
128 + 4 number of above number of points is the
(Memory frame, Plate, Display
Scatter chart stored memories total of the number of batch-
saving mode, Graph display
(number of points + 1) 3 3 displayed points the number
16) 1 form (type/size/color)
of collection times)
• Max. cumulative count (point
device data format):
9999 (16 bit, BCD value)
65535 (other than above)
Boundary, Level,
Level display 256 40 Pattern, Backgroud,
Graph, Pattern
• Display trigger
Shape, Frame,
Key/Bit/Word
Switch, Pattern,
256 (10) • Action
Touch key 40 Backgroud, Color, V
1 2 Key code/Bit/Word/
H, Text, High 5
Extended/Base/Window/
quality font
Station No./Buzzer
Format type/Format digits
Decimal : 1 to 13
Numerical Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
256 32 Numeral, Blink,
Input Octal : 1 to 6
Reverse
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate, Digits
ASCII input 256 8 + characters
Color, Blink, Reverse 1 to 80
When stored onto PC card:
Hardcopy 1 44
Max. 9999 files
Barcode 32
System
1
information
4 - 22
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen
64 + 36 (set number
of conditions) + 16
512/ (number of indirect Max. number of points for write
Screen, device and bit ALT device operation
Observe 512/ points in all conditions) + Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET,
Status Project 16 (total of write bit ALT: 40
4
in device points in all Data SET (16 bits): 20
common conditions) + 20 Data SET (32 bits): 10
(number of conditions
with word ranges)
8+4
sum of
When
devices in
stored in the
each recipe
internal
file + 108
memory
number
of recipe file
117
• Max. recipe operation:
number of
256 points
recipe files
• Max. number of points for write
Recipe +9
operation
sum of
16 bits: 8192
number of
When 32 bits: 4096
16 bit
stored in the
devices in
PC card
each recipe
file + 14
sum of 32
bit devices
in each
recipe file
Sound 100 128 Max. number of sound files: 100
Test
Max. number of monitor device
points
Floating
1 Consecutive bit devices:
alarm 80 Character size
(1Project) 512 points
display 6
Random bit devices:
255 points
Overlap
2047 80 + Depending on object
screen
Operation
1 128
panel
Print format, number • Report type
Numeri-
256 44 of print digits, number Real-time continuous/logging
cal
Report
of fraction digits page renewal

• Report screen:
Comment 256 48 number of print digits Up to 8 screens may be
created per project.
Time action operation

Time action 32 1592
Max. setting count: 32
4 - 23
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen
(36 + (40 number of

project scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
base screen calls set) +
(40 number of
displayed base screen
scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
window screen 1 calls
set) + (40 number of
displayed window screen
Script 256
1 scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
window screen 2 calls
displayed window screen
2 scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
superimpose screen calls
displayed superimpose
screen scripts set) 7
1 The number within parentheses indicates the maximum number of set points at the maximum setting of the setting item.
2 For the touch keys to which ON/OFF delays were set, the maximum number of set points is 100 points.
3 Unusable only when the memory storage function is used.
4 In the screen-based status observation function, the condition device browses the device after station number changing.
When the condition is enabled, write is performed to the device of the station number set to the object.
5 The device after station number changing is browsed only for the ON/OFF figure display status of the touch key.
Operation at a touch is performed for the device of the station number set to the object.
6 Operates only during ON.
7 The capacity of the script function set to each window is 0 bytes if the window screen is not displayed.
(a) Memory capacity for setting of high quality font

The memory capacity of high quality font is 128 bytes for 1 character
regardless of the character size.
(b) Maximum setting count when the cycle trigger is set for the
display
The maximum setting count in one screen for the cycle trigger is 100
points.
(c) Maximum setting count of objects

The maximum setting count of objects in one screen is 512 points.
If 513 or more objects are set in one screen, note that 513th object
becomes invalid.
4 - 24
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(d) Data capacity of object stored on PC card

Depending on the object used, it has a function which can store data on the
PC card.
The following table lists the capacity of data stored onto the PC card on an
object basis.
Object Name Data Capacity (Bytes)
Report function (Number of devices 8 + 36) + ((number of devices 8 + 8) collection count)
Alarm history function Approx. 34000
Data capacity per screen (see below) number of screens stored
Data Capacity per Screen
Model Data capacity (Kbytes)
A985GOT 470.0
A975GOT 301.0
A970GOT-TB , SB 150.0
Hard copy function
A970GOT-LB 37.6
A960GOT 37.6
A95 GOT-TBD 76.1
A95 GOT-SBD 37.6
A95 GOT-LBD 9.4
117 number of recipe files + 9 sum of 16-bit devices in each recipe file + 14 sum of
Recipe function
32-bit devices in each recipe file
4 - 25
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

digits
Decimal : 1 to 32
Numerical Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 32 Hexadecimal : 1 to 32
Display Numeral
Octal : 1 to 32
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
ASCII Shape, Frame, Plate,
10 32 number of display digits: 1 to 40
display Color
Data format
Clock Shape, Frame, Plate,
10 28 yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy,
display Color
Type1, Type2
Max. number of characters set
Comment Word: 36 to 1 comment:
50 Shape, Frame, Size
display Bit: 44 512 characters (independently of
character size)
Alarm history Shape, Frame, Plate, Max. number of monitor points
1 32
display Title Bit devices: 256 points
Alarm list Max. number of monitor points
display 1 32 Consecutive bit devices:
Size
(User alarm) 255 points
Display mode (Replay),
Word: 32 Type
Part display 50 Positioning (Top-
Bit: 36 Part/Mark
left/Center), Color
Lamp Frame, Lamp, Text,
50 32
display Color, V H
Meter type
1/4 Circle
Shape, Frame, Plate, (Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right
Panel meter
50 40 Needle, Meter panel, top/Left top/Left Bottom)
display
Scale display 1/2 Circle
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
3/4 Circle, Circle
Trend graph 40 + 2 Number of • Max. number of graphs : 4
1 Graph, Style, Scale
display graph lines • Max. number of points : 50
display
Line graph 36 + 2 Number of • Max. number of graphs : 4
1 Graph, Style, Scale
display graph lines • Max. number of points : 50
display
Bar graph Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 44 Max. number of graphs: 1
display Graph, Scale display
4 - 26
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Specifications

ON/OFF Sampling
Offset designation
Max.
During ON/OFF
Word device
Expression
Bit Trigger
Bit device
Sampling
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

Statistical
No. of Partitions, Graph:
graph 1 28 + devices
Direciton, Graph, Scale Rectangle graph/Circle graph
display
display
• Display trigger
Shape, Frame, Switch, Key/Bit
Touch key 50 28
Color, V H, Text • Action
Key code/Bit/Word/Base
digits
Decimal : 1 to 32
Numerical Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 48 Hexadecimal : 1 to 32
Input Numeral
Octal : 1 to 32
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate, number of display digits
ASCII input 10 32
Color 1 to 20
Hardcopy 1 24
40/ Max. number of points for write
Screen, operation
Observe 40/ Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET,
8 + 28 setting points
Status Project bit ALT: 40
in Data SET (16 bits): 20
common Data SET (32 bits): 10
• Max. recipe operation:
256 points
Recipe • Max. number of points for write
operation
16 bits: 4000
Max. number of monitor device
Floating
points
alarm 1 80 Character size
Consecutive bit devices:
display
256 points
Overlap
Depending on object
Screen
Operation
panel
Time action operation
Time action
Max. setting count: 32
Sampling Storage count: Max. 2000 times
(a) The number of parts that may be displayed actually is as follows:

[Maximum setting points in the above list] = [base screen] + [overlap screen]
(b) The size of the memory capacity changes with the conditions (such as the
presence/absence of the display frame).
The above sizes are the minimum sizes of the corresponding parts.
(c) The internal memory capacity of the GOT-F900 series is 512 bytes for the
F940GOT and 256 bytes for the F930GOT.
4 - 27
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.4 Overlap Setting
4.4.1 Figure and object
When the GOT is used for display, objects are displayed on figures regardless of the
setting order of objects.
4.4.2 Objects
For the following combinations only, objects can be displayed with overlap.
When the GOT is used for display for other cases not shown below, the overlap area
becomes improper display.
Make adjustments on the object display conditions to prevent overlap of multiple
objects on the GOT at the same time.
(1) Combination with touch key

Objects created without the touch key, Numerical input and ASCII input can be
overlapped with the touch key.
POINT
When setting the touch key, set "Shape" to "No". Do not set "Text".
(2) Combination with level display

Objects created with numerical display and comment display can be overlapped
with the level display. (only one object for one level display function)
In this case, the display mode in numerical display and comment display must be
designated to "Transparent" or "XOR".
If not designated, "Transparent" becomes effective as the default.
(Ex. 1) When the display mode is designated to "Transparent"

It is effective when using a color display.
98 98 98
(Ex. 2) When the display mode is designated to "XOR"

In contrast to the object in "Transparent", the overlap area of the level can
be inverted.
It is effective when using a black and white display.
FULL FULL
4 - 28
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.5 Available Devices
4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT
(1) GOT bit registers (GB), GOT data registers (GD)

These are the GOT's internal devices which may be used only within the GOT.
The GOT bit registers (GB) are bit devices and the GOT data registers (GD) are
word devices.
These devices are useful when you want to use devices in the following
processings which need not be passed through the PLC CPU.
• Screen switching device
• Script function work area
• Bar-code read value storage area
(2) GOT special registers (GS)

These are special registers designed for the GOT.
They store the GOT's internal information, communication conditions, script error
information, etc.
By monitoring these devices with various object functions and script functions,
you can gather various information of the GOT easily.
The following table lists the GOT special registers and device functions.
(a) Read devices
Device Function
GS0 Common information 1
GS1 Base screen information
GS2 to GS6 Reserved
GS7 1-second binary counter
GS8 Monitor scan time
GS9 Reserved
GS10 Monitor scan counter
GS11 to GS13 Reserved
GS14 Script common information
GS15 Script error pointer
GS16 Script number
GS17 Error code
: :
: :
GS46 Script number
GS47 Error code
GS48 Script execution pointer
GS49 to 79 Script execution number
GS80 to 383 Reserved
• Common information 1 (GS0)

b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle.
b1 : Remains ON from base/window screen switching until
one cycle of on-screen setting processing is completed.
(This also applies to station number changing and
security level changing.)
4 - 29
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
b2 : Reserved
b3 : Remains ON while the power-on initial screen appears.
b4 : Normally ON.
b5 : Normally OFF.
b6 to b15 : Reserved
• Base screen information (GS1)
b15 to b2 b1 b0
b0 : Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle of the base screen.
b1 : Remains ON from base screen switching until one cycle
of on-base screen setting processing is completed. (This
also applies to station number changing and security
level changing.)
• 1-second binary counter (GS7)
Incremented every second immediately after power-on.
The user can write a specific value, from which the counter will start
incrementing. The value is stored in binary.
• Monitor scan time (GS8)
Stores in binary the time (ms) until one cycle of processing set on the
display screen is completed.
The data is updated upon completion of all processings set on the
screen.
Errors of about ±10ms may occur depending on the processing setting.
Also, the object not processed by the security function will not be the
target.
• Monitor scan time counter (GS10)
Incremented every time one cycle of processing set on the display screen
is completed.
• Script common information (GS14)
Stores the error information of the script functions.
b15 to b13 b12 b11 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 b0
b0 : Turns ON at error occurrence.

b1 to b6 : Reserved
b7 : Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
b8 : Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
b12 : Turns ON at communication error occurrence.
4 - 30
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
• Script error pointer (GS15)

Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the
script error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated
below.
"-1" "16" "18" "20" ..... "46" "16"
The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to
47) as indicated below.
Example 1) When GS15 is 16, error data is stored into GS16, 17.
• Script error data (GS16 to GS47)
Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due
order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2-
word basis as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten
in order.
• Script execution pointer (GS48)
Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a
script execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as
indicated below.
"-1" "49" "50" "51" ..... "79" "49"
The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number
(GS49 to 79) as indicated below.
Example 1) When GS48 is 49, the execution number is stored into GS49.
• Script execution number (GS49 t GS79)
Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.
(b) Write devices

Device Function
GS384 Script common information
GS385 Script monitor time
GS386 to 511 Reserved
• Script common information (GS384)

Clears the script error data (GS16 to 47).
b15 to b1 b0
b0 : Turned ON to clear the script error data.

• Script monitor time (GS385)
Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.
If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is
stopped. (Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
4 - 31
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
Setting Example Monitor Time

0 (default) 10 seconds
1 1 second
10 10 seconds
11 11 seconds
• Screen script initial operation (GS386)

Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the
following conditions is enabled.
• The screen script function is used.
• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.
For example, when the trigger type is Bit OFF to ON and its trigger bit is
ON at the setting of "0", the screen is changed and the screen scripts are
then executed once.
Bit Value of
Setting Example Trigger Type Initial Operation
Trigger
Bit OFF to ON ON
0 Performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
Bit OFF to ON ON
Other than 0 Not performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
4 - 32
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series
The devices available for each object function of the GOT-A900 series depend on the
connection target CPU and connection form.
Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form
bases.
(1) QCPU (A Mode), ACPU

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M8191
Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191
Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF
Special internal relay (M) M9000 to M9255
Bit device
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047

Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF
Designated bit of the following word
Word device bit devices (except for index register and
buffer memory)
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB1023
Data register (D) D0 to D8191
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9255
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN1023
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF
File register (R) R0 to R8191
Word device
Block 1 to 255
Extended file register (ER)
Device R0 to R8191
(Z) Z0 to Z6 (Z0 = Z)
Index register 2
(V) V0 to V6 (V0 = V)
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1
Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM) BM0 to BMn 1
Converting the above bit devices to words
Bit device word 3 4
(except for timer and counter)
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD1023
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.
2 Writing to the index register is prohibited during computer link connection.
3 Use a multiple of 16 for setting device number.
4 If converting the special internal relay (M) to a bit device word, regard 9000 as 0 and use a
multiple of 16 for the device number.
(Example) M9000, M9016, M9240
4 - 33
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(2) QCPU (Q Mode), QnACPU

Device name Allowable range of monitoring
Timer
Bit device

Counter
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Designated bit of the following word
Word device bit devices (except for index register and
buffer memory)
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN32767
Word device

File register (R) R0 to R32767 1
Block 0 to 31
Extended file register (ER)
Device R0 to R32767
Extended file register (ZR) ZR0 to ZR1042431 2
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM) BM0 to BMn 3
Bit device word 4 Converting the above bit devices to words
1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is monitored.

2 Block file register that is switched by the QDRSET command is monitored.
3 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.
4 Set the device numbers in multiples of 16.
4 - 34
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(3) CC-Link connection (Remote device)

Available range for
Device name
monitoring
Remove input (RX) X0 to X7FF
Remote output (RY) Y0 to Y7FF
Bit device
Bit designation of remote register write area (RWw) Ww0 to WwFF
Bit designation of remote register read area (RWr) Wr0 to WrFF
Bit designation of GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD1023
Remote register write area (RWw) Ww0 to WwFF
Word device
Remote register read area (RWr) Wr0 to WrFF

Converting GOT bit register to word (GB) GB64 to GB1023
(4) FXCPU
Device number
expression
Input relay (X) X0000 to X0377
Octal notation
Output relay (Y) Y0000 to Y0377
Auxiliary relay (M) M0000 to M3071
Bit device
State (S) S0000 to S0999

Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255 Decimal notation
Timer contact (T) T000 to T255
Counter contact (C) C000 to C255
Word device bit 1 

Timer (current value) (T) T000 to T255
Counter (current value) (C) C000 to C255
Word device

RAM file register (D) D1000 to D7999
Decimal notation
Bit device word 2 3 
1 While the touch key function to which a word device bit is designated as the monitor device is
executed, do not write the word device in a sequence program.
2 Bit devices of the timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) cannot be converted to words.
3 Use a multiple of 16 for designating the device number.
4 - 35
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(5) Omron PLC

Available range for
Device name
monitoring
I/O relay
..0000 to 614315
Internal auxiliary relay
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR00000 to AR95915
Bit device Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115
Internal holding relay (W) WR00000 to WR51115
Timer contact (TIM) 1 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter contact (CNT) 1 CNT0000 to CNT2047
Data memory (DM) 2 DM00000 to DM9999
Timer (current value) (TIM) 2 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter (current value) (CNT) 2 CNT0000 to CNT2047
I/O relay 0000 to 6143
Holding relay (HR) HR000 to HR511
Word device
Internal holding relay (W) WR000 to WR511

Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Timer (current value) (TIM) TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter (current value) (CNT) CNT0000 to CNT2047
Extended data memory (EM current bank) 3
EM0000 to EM9999
Extended data memory (EM banks 0 to 12) 3
1 When CV1000 or CS1 is used, write cannot be performed.

2 When executing the touch key function with a word device bit specified as the monitor device, do
not perform write to that word device in a sequence program.
3 On extended data memory, write/read cannot be performed across banks.
(6) Yasukawa PLC

(a) When using GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120 or GL130
Coil O01 to O63424
Input relay I1 to I63424
Bit device
D1 to D2048
Link coil D10001 to D12048
D20001 to D22048
GOT bit register GB64 to GB1023
Input register Z1 to Z31840 1
Holding register W1 to W28291 2
Word device
R1 to R2048
Link register R10001 to R12048
R20001 to R22048
Constant register K1 to K4096 3
GOT data register GD64 to GD1023
1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to Z512. (Example of setting in default)
2 Change the input register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999. (Example of setting in default)
3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096. (Example of setting in default)
4 - 36
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(b) When using CP-9200SH, MP-920, MP-930

Word device Bit device

Coil MB0 to MB4095F
Input relay IB0000 to IBFFFF
Input register IW0 to IW7FFF
Holding register MW0 to MW32767
(c) When using CP-9300MS

Word device Bit device
Coil MB0 to MB3071F

Input relay IB0000 to IB3FF
Input register IW0 to IW3F
Holding register MW0 to MW3071
(d) When using CP-9200(H)

Bit device
Coil OB00000 to OB007FF

Input relay IB00000 to IB007FF
Input register IW00000 to IW007F
Output register OW0000 to OW007F
Word device
DW0000 to DW02047
Data register
ZD0000 to ZD02047 1
Common register MW0000 to MW7694
1 May be set only when CP-9200 is used.
(e) When using PROGIC-8

Coil o0001 to o2048 1
Bit device

Link coil D0001 to D1024
Input register Z0001 to Z0128
Word device
Holding register W0001 to W2048

Link register R0001 to R1024
1 Internal coils N1 to N1536 may be set as o513 to o2048.

However, make setting to avoid o1 to o0512 from overlapping o513 to o2048.
4 - 37
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(7) Allen-Bradley PLC

(a) When using SLC500 series
Device name Monitoring range Device No. notation
B0030000 to B003255F
Bit (B)
B0100000 to B255255F
TT0040000 to TT0042550
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
TT0100000 to TT2552550
TN0040000 to TN0042550
Timer (completion bit) (TN)
TN0100000 to TN2552550
Bit device
CU0050000 to CU0052550
Counter (up counter) (CU)
CU0100000 to CU2552550 Decimal
CD0050000 to CD0052550
Counter (down counter) (CD)
CD0100000 to CD2552550
CN0050000 to CN0052550
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
CN0100000 to CN2552550
N007000 to N007255
Integer (N)
N010000 to N255255
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB64 to GB1023
B003000 to B003255
Bit (B) 1
B010000 to B255255
TP004000 to TP004255
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
TP010000 to TP255255
TA004000 to TA004255
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
Word device
TA010000 to TA255255
CP005000 to CP005255
Counter (set value) (CP) 1 Decimal
CP010000 to CP255255
CA005000 to CA005255
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
CA010000 to CA255255
N007000 to N007255
Integer (N) 1
N010000 to N255255
GOT internal data register (GD) GD64 to GD1023
1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.

2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be
displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.
(b) When using Micrologix 1000 series

Bit (B) B0030000 to B003031F
Timer (timing bit) (TT) TT0040000 to TT0040390
Timer (completion bit) (TN) TN0040000 to TN0040390
Bit device
Counter (up counter) (CU) CU0050000 to CU0050310

Decimal
Counter (down counter) (CD) CD0050000 to CD0050310
Counter (completion bit) (CN) CN0050000 to CN0050310
Integer (N) N0070000 to N007104F
Bit (B) B003000 to B003031
Timer (set value) (TP) TP004000 to TP004039 1
Word device
Timer (current value) (TA) TA004000 to TA004039 1

Counter (set value) (CP) CP005000 to CP005031 1
Decimal
Counter (current value) (CA) CA005000 to CA005031 1
Integer (N) N007000 to N007014 1

4 - 38
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(c) When using Micrologix 1500 series

Bit (B) B0030000 to B255255F
Timer (timing bit) (TT) TT0030000 to TT2552550
Timer (completion bit) (TN) TN0030000 to TN2552550
Bit device
Counter (up counter) (CU) CU0030000 to CU2552550
Decimal
Counter (down counter) (CD) CD0030000 to CD2552550
Counter (completion bit) (CN) CN0030000 to CN2552550
Integer (N) N0030000 to N255255F
Bit (B) B003000 to B255255
Timer (set value) (TP) TP003000 to TP255255 1
Word device
Timer (current value) (TA) TA003000 to TA255255 1

Counter (set value) (CP) CP003000 to CP255255 1
Decimal
Counter (current value) (CA) CA003000 to CA255255 1
Integer (N) N003000 to N255255 1

(8) Sharp PLC

Device name Setting monitor Device No. notation
0 to 15777
I/O relay
20000 to 75777
Timer counter (contact) T/C0000 to T/C1777
T/C0000 to T/C1777
Timer counter (current value)
(b0000 to b3776)
09000 to 09776
19000 to 19776
29000 to 29776
39000 to 39776
49000 to 49776
59000 to 59776
69000 to 69776
79000 to 79776
89000 to 89776
Register
99000 to 99776
Octal
E0000 to E0776
E1000 to E1776
E2000 to E2776
E3000 to E3776
E4000 to E4776
E5000 to E5776
E6000 to E6776
E7000 to E7776
1000000 to 1177776
2000000 to 2177776
3000000 to 3177776
File register 4000000 to 4177776
5000000 to 5177776
6000000 to 6177776
7000000 to 7177776
4 - 39
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(9) Toshiba PLC

Available range for setting
Device name
monitor
External input (X) X0000 to X511F
External output (Y) Y0000 to Y511F
Internal relay (R) R0000 to R999F
Special relay (S) S0000 to S255F
Link register relay (Z) Z0000 to Z999F
Bit device
Link relay (L) L0000 to L255F

Timer (contact) (T) 4 T000 to T999
Counter (contact) (C) 4 C000 to C511
Designated bit of the following
word devices (except timer
Word device bit 5
(current value) and counter
(current value))
External input (X) XW000 to XW511
External output (Y) YW000 to YW511
Internal relay (R) RW000 to RW999
Special relay (S) SW000 to SW255
Link register relay (Z)  3
Link relay (L) LW000 to LW255
Timer (current value) (T) 4 T000 to T999
Word device
Counter (current value) (C) 4 C000 to C511

Data register (D) 2 D0000 to D8191
Link register (W) W0000 to W2047
File register (F) F0000 to F32467 1
Conversion of the above bit
devices to words (except link
Bit device word register relay, timer (contact)
and counter (contact))
GOT data register (GD)
1 The extended file register is not supported.

2 When the mode switch on the CPU module is set to "P-RUN", D0000 to D4095 are write disabled.
3 The Z relay corresponds to 1 bit in 1000 words from W registers 0 to 999.
4 The contacts and current values of the timers/counters are written after they have been read
once. During that period, therefore, do not change them in the sequence program.
5 The bit of the word device is designated after it has been read once. During that period, therefore,
do not change it in the sequence program.
4 - 40
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(10) SIEMENS PLC connection

(a) SIMATIC S7-300 series
Bit device
Output relay Q0000 to Q1277
Bit memory M0000 to M2557
Input relay IW000 to IW126
Output relay QW000 to QW126
Bit memory MW000 to MW254
Timer (present value) T000 to T127
Counter (present value) C00 to C63
D000100000 to D000108190
Word device
D000200000 to D000208190
D000300000 to D000308190
•
Data register
•
•
D012600000 to D012608190
D012700000 to D012708190
(b) SIMATIC S7-400 series

Bit device
Output relay Q0000 to Q5117

Bit memory M00000 to M20477
Input relay IW000 to IW510
Output relay QW000 to QW510
Bit memory MW0000 to MW2046
Timer (present value) T000 to T511
Counter (present value) C000 to C511
D000100000 to D000165534
Word device
D000200000 to D000265534
D000300000 to D000365534
•
Data register
•
•
D409400000 to D409465534
D409500000 to D409565534
4 - 41
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(11) Hitachi PLC connection

External input (X) X00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal +
External output (Y) Y00000 to Y05A95 decimal
Remote external input (X) X10000 to X49995
Decimal
Remote external output (Y) Y10000 to Y49995
First CPU link (L) L0000 to L3FFF
Second CPU link (L) L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal
Data area (M) M0000 to M3FFF
On-delay timer (TD) 1 TD000 to TD255
Bit device
Single-shot timer (SS) 1 SS000 to SS255

Watchdog timer (WDT) 1 WDT000 to WDT255
Monostable timer (MS) 1 MS000 to MS255
Decimal
Retentive timer (TMR) 1 TMR000 to TMR255
Up counter (CU) 1 CU000 to CU511
Ring counter (RCU) 1 RCU000 to RCU511
Up/down counter (CT) 1 CT000 to CT511
Bit internal output (R) R000 to R7BF Hexadecimal
DIF (leading edge detection) 1 DIF000 to DIF511
DFN (trailing edge detection) 1 DFN000 to DFN511 Decimal
External input (WX) WX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal +
External output (WY) WY0000 to WY05A7 decimal
Remote external input (WX) WX1000 to WX4997
Decimal
Remote external output (WY) WY1000 to WY4997
First CPU link (WL) WL000 to WL3FF
Word device
Second CPU link (WL) WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal

Data area (WM) WM000 to WM3FF
Timer/counter (elapsed value)(TC)
TC000 to TC511 Decimal
1
Word internal output (WR) WR000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal
Decimal
GOT special register (GS) GS0 toGS511
1 The same number cannot be used.

(12) Microcomputer connection

GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB1023 1

Bit device

Specified bit of word
 1
device
Word device

GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD1023 1
1 Write and read operations for GB and GD devices cannot be performed from the host.
4 - 42
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series
The devices available for each object function of the GOT-F900 series depend on the
connection target CPU and connection form.
Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form
bases.
(1) QCPU(A Mode), ACPU

Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
Bit device

Timer
Counter
Timer (set value) (TS) TS0 to TS2047
Word device

Counter (set value) (CS) CS0 to CS1023
File register (R) R0 to R8191
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1
(Z) Z0 to Z6 (Z0 = Z)
Index register 1
(V) V0 to V6 (V0 = V)
1 Write to the index register cannot be performed during computer link connection.
(2) FXCPU
Available range for Device number
Device name
setting/monitoring notation
Input relay (X) X0000 to X0377
Octal
Output relay (Y) Y0000 to Y0377
Auxiliary relay (M) M0000 to M3071
Bit device
State (S) S0000 to S0999

Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255 Decimal
Timer contact (T) T000 to T255
Counter contact (C) C000 to C255
GOT bit register (GB) GB132 to GB1023 
Timer (current value) (T) T000 to T255
Counter (current value) (C) C000 to C255
Word device

RAM file register (D) D1000 to D7999
Decimal
(Z) Z0 to Z7
Index register
(V) V0 to V7
4 - 43
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(3) QCPU(Q Mode), QnACPU

Bit device

Timer
Counter
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Special register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Word device

Timer (current value) (TN) 2 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN) 2 CN0 to CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN32767
File register (R) 2 R0 to R32767 1
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is set/monitored.

2 When the GOT-F900 series is connected to the system where the A series computer link module
is loaded in the QnACPU, monitoring and write cannot be performed on the timers, counters and
file registers.
Also note that the available range for setting/monitoring will be the range of the ACPU (AnACPU
equivalent).
4 - 44
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT
(3) Omron PLC

I/O relay
..0000 to 51115
Internal auxiliary relay
Bit device
Holding relay (HR) HR0000 to HR9915
Timer contact (TIM) TIM000 to TIM511
Counter contact (CNT) CNT000 to CNT511
Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Word device
Timer (current value) (TIM) TIM000 to TIM511

Counter (current value) (CNT) CNT000 to CNT511
(4) Microcomputer board

Bit data (M) M0 to M2047

Bit device
Special internal relay 1 M8000 to M8063
GOT bit device (GB) GB132 to GB1023

Word device
Word data D0 to D4095

Special data register 1 D8000 to D8015
GOT word device (GD) GD100 to GD1023
1 Special is a device used for special applications (such as interrupt output and communication
error information) of the GOT.
(5) Allen-Bradley PLC

Device
Available range for
Device name number
setting/monitoring
notation
B0030000 to B003255F
Bit (B) Octal
B0100000 to B255255F
TT0040000 to TT0042550
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
TT0100000 to TT2552550
TN0040000 to TN0042550
Timer (timing bit) (TN)
Bit device
TN0100000 to TN2552550
CU0050000 to CU0052550
Counter (up counter) (CU)
CU0100000 to CU2552550
CD0050000 to CD0052550
Counter (down counter) (CD)
CD0100000 to CD2552550
CN0050000 to CN0052550
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
CN0100000 to CN2552550
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB132 to GB1023 Decimal
TP004000 to TP004255
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
TP010000 to TP255255
TA004000 to TA255255
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
TA010000 to TA255255
Word device
CP004000 to CP255255
Counter (set value) (CP) 1
CP010000 to CP255255
CA005000 to CA005255
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
CA010000 to CA255255
N0070000 to N007255
Integer (N)
N010000 to N255255
4 - 45
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
(1) About object item settings

Each object item has settings to be made to achieve function outline examples.
The settings given are specifically only the items where the default values of that
object must be changed.
Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Graph : Sample <Device/Attribute> X axis Device: D100
<Basic>tab
Display mode : Locus tab Y axis Device: D200
(2) About setting item list

The items marked " " in the setting item list of each object item are registered to
the keyword function of the help.
By entering a keyword to make a search, you can directly display the explanation
of the corresponding portion.
"Numerical display" dialog box
Basic
Basics tab
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the DeviceNo.

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
5 Shape
Data length 16bit/32bit
Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Numeral Designation of Color (0 to 255)
1) Enter keyword.
Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item

list appears.
2) Search.
3) As a result of search, multiple candidates
for the[Numeral] item appear.
Here, choose "Numeral" in
[Numerical Display] dialog box.
4) Display.
5-1
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.1 Data Display Functions

The data display functions show the PLC CPU's memory data in real time. They are
available in the following types.
• Numerical display function...........Shows a numerical value.
• Data list display function ..............Shows numerical values in tabular form.
• ASCII display function..................Shows a text.
• Clock display function ..................Shows time.
5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value)
This function shows data stored in a PLC CPU device as a numerical value.
(1) Function outline
(a) Reads the data stored in a PLC CPU device to the GOT and displays it as a
numerical value in real time.
D100 150
150
5
Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Device: D100
(b) Changes the displayed numerical color/background color according to the

current value of a monitor device.
Present temperature Present temperature Present temperature
58 -20 125
(Monitor device: D0)
Case1: Defined case($V<0), Numeral: 3
<Basic>tab Device : D0 <Case>tab Case2: Defined case(100<$V), Numeral: 0
Plate: 255
(c) Used with the level display function (refer to Section 5.4.6).
(Only when using the GOT-A900 series)
25 98

<Basic>tab Device: D0 Numeral: 0 <Option>tab Display mode: XOR
POINT
• The numerical display function allows only one value to be superimposed on one
level indication provided by the level display function.
• A numerical value on a level indication does not blink (flicker).
5-2
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The numerical display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Numerical display" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Device Device
Basic tab
Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Numeral/Numeral and Plate
Reverse Unchecked/checked
Form
Format Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp all digits (add 0) Unchecked/checked
High quality font Unchecked/checked
Size (Height width size setting)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)
Case
Extended tab
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing
(Setting for each case) conditional expression and display attribute.
Delete
Option
Security
Offset Checked/Unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Display mode Transparent/XOR

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger
Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.
Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
5-3
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Form
Disp all digits (add 0) Unchecked/checked
Expression
Gain 1 (Gain 1 value setting)
Offset (Offset value setting)
(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up numerical display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• Display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value
reaches the specified value.
• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.
Only one value may be superimposed on a level display.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Expression can be set.
5-4
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values)
This function gathers the states of multiple word devices periodically and lists them as
numerical values.
(a) Sorts a list in the preset priority according to the states of the corresponding
word devices (D11, D21, D31, D41).
GOT display setting
Machining
count result Plan Output Failure
D10: 100 D30: 100 D10: 100 D30: 100
Machine
D11: 10 D31: 30 D11: 30 D31: 32 1 (D10) (D11) (D12)
D12: 3 D32: 3 D12: 3 D32: 5 Machine (D20) (D21) (D22)
2
Machine
D20: 100 D40: 100 (D30) (D31) (D32)
D20: 100 D40: 100 3
D21: 25 D41: 40 D21: 25 D41: 41 Machine (D40) (D41) (D42)
4
D22: 3 D42: 3 D22: 3 D42: 3
Sorted in ascending order
on the basis of this column.
List is sorted every time the display is updated.
Machining Machining
No. count result Plan Output Failure No. count result Plan Output Failure
1 Machine 100 10 1 Machine

1 3 100 25 3
2
2 Machine 2 Machine
100 20 3 100 30 3
2 1
3 Machine 100 3 Machine
30 3 100 32 3
3 3
4 Machine 4 Machine
100 40 3 100 41 3
4 4

Rows :4 Row1: Columns 2 Device(D10)
Display rows :4 Row2: Columns 2 Device(D20)
<Form>tab Columns :4 <List>tab Row3: Columns 2 Device(D30)
Sort: : Ascending Row4: Columns 2 Device(D40)
Sort/Attr. column :3 Device: Random
(b) Using the data list display function and graph display (statistical graph in the
example) together shows multiple device states effectively.
Machine
No. name Target Output
Machine
1 1 100 24
Machine
2 2 100 42
Machine
3 3 100 22
Machine
4 4 100 22

Row1: Columns 2 Device (D10), Label
foreground: 255 (White)
Rows :4
foreground: 224 (Red)
Display rows :4
Columns :3
<Form>tab <List>tab foreground: 3 (Blue)
Label :2
Sort: : Number
foreground: 252 (Yellow)
Sort/Attr. column :3
Device: Random
: In a statistic graph, set the monitor devices
and display colors to match the above.
5-5
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The data list display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Data List" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab

Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Title Designation of Title (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Rule Designation of Rule (0 to 255)

Reverse Checked/unchecked
Form
Rows
Display rows (Row count setting)
Columns (Column count setting)
Label Checked/unchecked
Interval (Vertical horizontal spacing setting)
Sort Number/Ascending/Descending/No sort
Sort/Attr. column
High quality font Checked/unchecked
List
Row.n Edit Rows dialog box
Comment No. Comment List dialog box ..Set the display comment.
Label pattern Designation of Label pattern
Label foreground Designation of Label foreground (0 to 255)
Label background Designation of Label background (0 to 255)
Col.n Edit Columus dialog box
Format
Disp. all digits (add 0)
Device BCD/Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Title (Set the column item name)
Color (0 to 255) 16bit/32bit
Expression
Device Continuous/Random
Comment Continuous/Random
Case
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing conditional
Delete expression and display attribute.
5-6
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Option
Extended tab
Security
Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Trigger
16bit/32bit
Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up data list display" from Contents
of Help.
POINT
• Security and offset can be set.
• Display Label rows can be set. Combining the label rows and statistical or bar
graphs makes effective display.
• Display sequence can be sorted in the ascending or descending order of number
or device values.
• Display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value
reaches the specified value.
5-7
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character
string)
This function regards the data stored consecutively in word devices as text data (ASCII
code) and shows them as a character string.
(a) Recognizes the data stored consecutively within the corresponding word
devices (D10 to D14) as text data and shows them as a character string on
the GOT.
D10: 5841H (XA)

D11: 342DH (4-)
D12: 0031H (1)
AX-41

Size :8 8
<Basic>tab Device: D10 <Form>tab
Digits :5
(b) Updates the characters according to the condition with the monitor device
value changed from a peripheral device, sequence program or the like.
D10: 504FH (PO) D10: 5453H (TS)
D11: 5245H (RE) D11: 504FH (PO)
D12: 5441H (TA) D12: 2020H ( )
D13: 2045H ( E) D13: 2020H ( )
Operating condition Operating condition

Line 1 OPERATE Line 1 STOP

<Basic>tab Device: D10 <Form>tab Digits: 8
5-8
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The ASCII display function consists of the following setting items.
• "ASCII display" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Text/Text and Plate
Form

Option
Extended tab
Security
Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Trigger
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN

5-9
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Form

Alignment Left/Right/Center
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up ASCII display" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
5 - 10
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU)
This function displays the PLC CPU's clock data (GOT-A900 series) or GOT's built-in
clock data (GOT-F900 series) on the GOT.
Reads and shows the clock data of the PLC CPU at power-on, and verifies
the clock data with that of the PLC CPU periodically to update the clock
indication.
Either the date or time can be displayed.
00/08/11
13:48
1) Clock display object (date indication) 2) Clock display object (time indication)
<Basic>tab Display style: Date Shape: checked <Basic>tab Display style: Time
<Form>tab Data format: yy/mm/dd

Shows the GOT's built-in clock data.
Either the date or time can be displayed.
11/AUG/2000(FRI)
13:48:40
1) Clock display object (date indication) 2) Clock display object (time indication)
<Basic>tab Display style: Date Shape: checked <Basic>tab Display style: Time
<Form>tab Data format: Type1 <Form>tab Data format: Type1
5 - 11
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The clock display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Clock" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Display Date
style
Time
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Form
Data format yy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
High quality font Checked/unchecked

Extended tab
Option
Security

Basic
Display Date
style
Time
Form
Data format yy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
Type1
Type2
5 - 12
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up clock display" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
• Security can be set.
• The clock display function reads the clock data of the following PLC CPU
depending on the connection form.
Connection form Clock data read destination
Bus connection, CPU direct-connection,
PLC CPU at connection destination
computer link connection
MELSECNET connection PLC CPU of master station/control station
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) PLC CPU of master station/local station
CC-Link connection (remote device station) Clock display function cannot be performed.
• When a communication board having a built-in clock function is installed to the
GOT (except A95 GOT), the clock display is available when the
microcomputer connection is chosen. (When the computer link connection
(including third-party PLC connection) is chosen, the clock function of that
communication board cannot be used.)
For specifications and performance details of the communication board having
built-in clock function, refer to the A9GT-RS2T serial communication board
user's manual.
5 - 13
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.2 Message Display Functions
The message display functions show comments or error messages corresponding to

the PLC CPU status.
They are available in the following types.
• Comment display function .........Shows a comment corresponding to a device state.
• Alarm history display function....Shows occurrence times and comments when
condition is enabled.
• Alarm list display function ..........Shows error messages or comments in list form.
5.2.1 Comment display function (shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of

monitor device)
This function shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device or the

specified range of a word device.
(a) Shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).
OFF
X0
ON
X0 is OFF X0 is ON

<Basic>tab Device: X0
(b) Shows a comment corresponding to the value of a word device (D100).

When the GOT-F900 series is used, this function shows the comment of the
comment number equal to the value of the word device (D100).
D100 1 10 100
Current production Current production Today's production

quantity is 1. quantity is 10. is completed.

(c) Changes the entire on-screen comment display according to ON/OFF of the
bit device (X0). (Example: Changing between Japanese and English)

<Basic>tab Device: X0(Set the same device to all objects)
ON time setting : Direct(Enter comment data in Japanese)
<Case(Bit)>tab
OFF time setting : Direct(Enter comment data in English)
5 - 14
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The comment display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Comment Display" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Device Device dialog box

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Size Specify (height width size).
Blink (Text/Text and Plate)
Case (Bit)
ON/Off No. Comment List dialog box ...Setting of display comment

Direct Unchecked/checked
High quality font
Copy from ON(OFF only)
Attribute(ON)/ Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)

Attribute(OFF) Change attribute Unchecked/checked
Text Designation of Color
Case (Word)
Edit Display Format

Edit Range Edit range dialog box
dialog box
...Set the conditional expression.
Indication No./ Indirect/ Hold
Attribute Plate Designation of Plate

Change Unchecked/checked
attribute
Blink None/Low
Middle/High
Reverse Unchecked
Delete Deletion of setting /checked
5 - 15
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Option
Extended tab
Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Display mode Transparent/XOR
Preview Unchecked/checked
comment Browse Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment
Trigger
16bit/32bit

5 - 16
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Data type Bit/Word
Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Case (Bit)
ON/Off No. Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment

Direct Unchecked/checked
Copy from ON (OFF only)
Attribute(ON)/ Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)

Attribute(OFF) Change attribute Unchecked/checked
Case (Word)
Edit Display Format

Edit Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
dialog box
Change attribute
Start No. Set the first device number of comment to be displayed.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up comment display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
• Multiple line comments can be displayed.
• Display color and attributes of a comment can be changed when the monitor
device (bit) value turns ON/OFF.
• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.
Note that only one comment display may be superimposed on a level display.
5 - 17
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.2.2 Alarm history display function (shows a history of occurrence times, comments and
others when a condition is enabled)
This function shows as history data the occurrence times, comments and other
information when the specified bit device turns on or the condition of a word device
value is enabled.
(a) Error history display
Shows a history list of dates and times, messages and others when a
device is confirmed to have turned on (error occurrence). (On the GOT-
F900 series, shows only the occurrence dates and times, messages and
occurrence counts.)
OFF
X0 OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS CUMLAT COUNT
98/06/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 11:25 10:45 01:00 1
ON 98/06/01 12:05 Conveyor 2 error 12:40 12:28 00:20 5
98/06/01 12:35 Conveyor 3 error 13:20 12:50 00:15 2
Shows the history when the monitor device turns on.
<Basic>tab Mode: Cumulation
Alarm History (Common) dialog box
<Monitor Device>tab Delete No.: Continuous, Comment No.: Continuous, Device: X10
Display style: Occurences, Restorations, Checks, Cumulative, Occur
Alarm History (Form) dialog box <Form>tab
frequency
(b) Error detail display (only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Details and action for the comment turned on (when an error occurred) can
be displayed on the base window, window screen or comment window.
OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS
98/06/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45
98/06/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28
98/06/01 12:35 Line 3 error
Move Detailed Delete
upward display display
Detailed display screen appears by one touch/touch key entry.

When detail display is provided by one touch, the above
message selection cursors do not appear.
The specified comment is Window screen of the Base screen of the

displayed on the special designated number is designated number is
window screen for alarm displayed. displayed.
history display.
X0
Line 1 CHECK
Line 1 CHECK
Line 1 CHECK
ON
Alarm history display Alarm history display
Register as comments the detailed Display on the specified window screen or base screen the detailed
contents and corrective actions for contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn
when the specified devices turn to to ON status.
ON status.

Alarm History (Common) dialog box <Basic>tab Detailed display: Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen
5 - 18
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The alarm history display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box
Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Mode History
Cumulation
Alarm Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 3072).
Watch cycle Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).
Detailed display Not display/Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen
History store Unchecked/checked
History erase Unchecked/checked
Memory store Unchecked/checked
Set the storage cycle (1 to 60).
When number of alarm occurences exceed set Unchecked/checked
value, delete oldest alarm occurences
History print Unchecked/checked
Print Format Print Format dialog box
Delete Delete the setting. ...Set the row count, column count, margins, etc.
Monitor Device
Device No. Continuous/Random/Fixed

Comment No. Continuous/Random
Display No. Continuous/Random
Edit Alarm History
Edit Type Bit/Bit of Word/Signed(BIN16)/
dialog box
Unsigned(BIN16)/Signed(BIN32)/
Unsigned(BIN32)/BCD16/BCD32/Real

...Setting of Device No.
Range Setting of Defined case
Comment No. Designation of Comment No.
Display No. Designation of Detailed display No.
Device reset Unchecked/checked
Copy Alarm History
Copy Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count,
dialog box copied data, etc.
Print Condition
Title Unchecked/checked
Date Set the text printed in date field.
Time Set the text printed in time field.
Message Set the text printed in message field.
Cumulative time Set the text printed in cumulative time field.
Occur frequency Unchecked/
checked
Set the text printed in
occurrence count field.
State Set text displayed in status field.
State Occurred Unchecked/checked
print out Set the text printed at occurrence.
Restored Unchecked/checked
Set the text printed at restoration.
Checks Unchecked/checked
Set the text printed at checking.
5 - 19
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Basic tab
Shape Image List dialog box
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255) ...Choose the Image List.
Rule Unchecked/checked
Designation of Rule (0 to 255)
Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box.
Form
Disp. rows Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)
Disp. head Designation of Disp. head (1 to 3072)
Sort Oldest/Latest
Size Designation of Size (V H)
Interval Designation of Interval (V H)
Display style Occurences

Restorations Unchecked/checked
Checks Unchecked/checked
Cumulative Unchecked/checked
Occur frequency Unchecked/checked
One touch Unchecked/checked
Format
Title Set the history item title.
Wide Set the width of history item field.
Color Specify the history item color (0 to 255).
Contents Date,Time / Date / Time / string

yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd
hh:mm:ss / hh:mm
Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.
Extended tab
Option
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)
5 - 20
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box
Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Mode History
Cumulation
Alarm Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 1024).
Watch cycle Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).
Detailed display Not display/Comment window/Base Screen
History store Unchecked/checked
History erase Unchecked/checked

When number of alarm occurences exceed set value, Unchecked/checked
delete oldest alarm occurences
Delete Delete the setting.
Monitor Device
Edit Alarm History

Edit Type Bit
dialog box
Comment No. Designation of Comment No.
Display No. Designation of Detailed display No.
Device reset Unchecked/checked
Copy Alarm History
Copy Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count, copied data, etc.
dialog box
Print Condition
Print condition setting is fixed.
5 - 21
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Basic tab
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box.
Form
Disp. rows Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)
Sort Oldest
Latest
Display style Occurences

Restorations Unchecked/checked
Occur frequency Unchecked/checked
Format
Title Set the history item title.
Wide Set the width of history item field.
Color Specify the history item color (0 to 255).

Contents Date,Time / Date / Time / String
yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd
hh:mm:ss / hh:mm
Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.
5 - 22
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up alarm history display" "Setting up alarm history display"
from Contents of Help.
POINT
• By using the PC card, the history data can be backed up.
• The ladder monitor function can be started while the device corresponding to
the one which turned ON or fell within the designated range is being searched.
• Alarm history can be printed out.
• The current number of alarm history data can be stored into the designated
word device.
• The display for the restored device can be deleted using the designated bit
device as trigger.
• When using the following alarm history display function on the A95 GOT,
either of the following corresponding option unit must be installed.
(Cannot be used with the A950 handy GOT.)
For PC card storage : Memory card interface unit
For history printing : Printer interface unit
Only one of the above option units can be installed on the A95 GOT.
Note that PC card storage and history printing cannot be used at the same
time.
• The current status of the alarm history display can be printed out.
• The number of errors entered into the monitoring devices can be stored.
5 - 23
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error
occurrence)
This function shows error information at error occurrence or shows comments

corresponding to multiple devices in priority order.
(a) Shows error information at error occurrence. (Only when the GOT-A900
series is used)
Monitors GOT/PLC CPU/MELSECNET communication at intervals of three
seconds to check for errors, and shows an error code or error message at
error occurrence. You need not create error messages and numbers as they
are registered in the GOT. (Occurrence time is also displayed at occurrence
of a GOT error.) Use this function to detect PLC CPU/MELSECNET
communication errors.
Voltage dropped below

rated value

<Basic>tab Type: System
(b) Shows comments corresponding to multiple bit devices, which are ON, in the
specified priority order (order of ascending ON bit device numbers for the
GOT-F900 series).
Occurrence Occurrence
order order
Message Message
2) X1 X3 Check products 2) X1 X3 Check products
X2 X1 Conveyor fault 3) X2 X1 Conveyor fault
X2 Inspect conveyor
1) X3 1) X3

<Basic>tab Type: User
<Form>tab Device points: 4 Device: X1 Continuous: checked
5 - 24
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The alarm list display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Alarm List" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Type System
User
Plate Designation of Background
Size Designation of Comment Size (V H)
Form
Device points Set the Device points
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Storage Unchecked/checked
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Comment No. Set the first device number Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment
of comment to be displayed.
Number Plural/Single
Sort Ascending/Descending/Oldest/Latest
Option
Extended tab
Security Specify of Security (0 to 15)

Detailed display Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen
Store memory Unchecked/checked
Scroll on Unchecked/checked
Display date Unchecked/checked
Detail
Disp. Set the Comment No.
One touch Unchecked/checked
Trigger
16bit/32bit

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set bit device and condition enabling.
5 - 25
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Plate Set the background color (0 to 255)
Size Designation of Comment Size (V H)
Form
Device points Set the Device points
Storage Unchecked/checked
Comment No. Set the first device number of Comment List dialog box ...Setting of Indication
comment to be displayed.
Number Plural/Single
Sort Ascending/Descending
Option
Detailed display Comment window/Base Screen

Scroll on Unchecked/checked
Display date Unchecked/checked
Detail
Disp. Set the Comment No.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up alarm list display (system
alarms/user alarms)" from Contents of Help.
POINT
• Priority can be displayed in the order of occurrence/number.
• Multiple or single comments can be displayed in the order of priority.
• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
(If single comment is selected for display)
• The GOT can count the bit devices turned ON and store the count in the word
device.
• Details and actions for the comment turned ON can be displayed on the base
screen, window screen or comment window.
• The ladder monitor function screen can be activated while the device
corresponding to the bit device turned ON is being searched.
• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
(If single comment is selected for display)
• The number of bit devices which are now ON can be stored.
5 - 26
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.3 Animation Display Functions
5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device)
This function shows a registered part/screen corresponding to a device.

(Screen display is provided only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
(a) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).
OFF
X0
ON
Switch ON

<Case(Bit)>tab ON Part No.: 1 OFF Part No.: 2
(b) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a word device (D100).
D100 1 10 100
GOT

Range: $V==1 Indicate Part No.: 1
<Case(Word)>tab Range: $V==10 Indicate Part No.: 2
Range: $V==100 Indicate Part No.: 3
(c) Shows the specified part according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X1, X2).
OFF ON OFF
X1 X1 X1
OFF OFF ON
X2 X2 X2

Parts switching: Fixed Part No.: 1 Device: X1
<Basic>tab <Trigger>tab
Parts switching: Fixed Part No.: 2 Device: X2
5 - 27
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The part display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Part Display" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
switching
Display mode Replay/XOR/Overwrite
Positioning Top-left/Center
Type Part
Mark Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Base Screen
Window screen
Fixed Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Color (0 to 255)
Case (Bit)
On/Off-Time setting
No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Case(Word)
Edit Edit Display Format Range Edit range

dialog box dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Indicate No./Indirect/Color/Hold
Attribute Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Delete (Deletion of display setting)
Extended tab
Option
Offset Device dialog box ...Designation of offset value
Preview Image List dialog box

comment
Trigger
16bit/32bit

5 - 28
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
switching
Data type Bit/Word
Display mode Replay
Type Part
Fixed Color (0 to 255)
Case(Bit)

Case(Word)
Start No.
Preview comment Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Security, offset and expression (for display method "case (word) " only) can be
set.
• Parts/screens registered by the user can be displayed.
• The user-created base/window screen can be displayed as a part.
• According to the change of the device, only the white area of the registered
part figure can be displayed in a different color.
Only one part can be used.
• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the value of the
monitor device. (For display method "case (word)" only)
• The displayed parts, display colors and attributes can be changed according to
ON/OFF of the bit devices. (For display method "case (bit)" only)
• By setting the part/screen number to "0", the displayed part/screen can be
deleted.
• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small),
unnecessary display is automatically deleted.
• Parts registered by the user can be displayed.
• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the ON/OFF of
the bit device. (For display method "case (bit)" only)
• The displayed parts can be erased by setting their numbers to unregistered
numbers.
• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small),
unnecessary display is automatically deleted.
5 - 29
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a
device)
This function shows the movement or locus of a part figure, which corresponds to
ON/OFF of a bit device or the value of a word device, in the specified moving method.
(a) Specifies movement display coordinates with the values of two word devices
(D100, D101).
Regarding the values of the two word devices (D100, D101) as the X and Y
coordinates, this function changes the values of the two word devices (D100,
D101) to display the movement of a part figure.
100 250 400
D100 100 250 400
D101 100 200 300 100 Y coordinate
(D101) 200
Parts
Parts
X coordinate (D100) 300
Parts

Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab Move way: Position Position: D100
(b) Shows a part at a point position in the specified path.

Presetting the path and point numbers shows a part in the position of the point
number corresponding to the word device (D100) value.
The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.
Preset path Point number: 1 Point number: 2 Point number: 4
1 3
D100 1 2 4 Parts
2 4 Parts Parts
Numbers are point
numbers.
Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab Move way: Point Position: D100 Route No.: 1
Parts Move Route dialog box Route No.: 1 Points: 4
(c) Shows a part at any position on a line defined by the specified starting and
end points.
Shows a part on a line which is defined by the starting point (0%) and the end
point (100%) by changing the word device (D100) value relative to the upper
and lower limits.
The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.
Preset starting and Part is displayed with starting point Displayed at position Displayed at position Displayed at position
end points preset as 0% and end point as 100%. of 70%. of 30%. of 50%.
Starting End
point point D100 70 30 50 End End End
point point point
Parts Parts Parts
Starting point Starting point Starting point
Preset upper limit : 100
Preset lower limit : 0
Move way: Line Position: D100 Maximum: 100
Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab
Minimum: 0
5 - 30
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The part movement function consists of the following setting items.
• "Part Movement" dialog box
Set the part movement display function.
Basic
Basic tab
Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
switching
Move way Position/Line/Point
Route No.
Position Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Maximum/Minimum
Display mode Movement/Locus
Type Part
Fixed Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Color (0 to 255)
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-Time setting
Color Setting of part color (0 to 255)
Case(Word)
Edit Display Format Edit range
Edit Range ...Set the device value range.
dialog box dialog box
Indicate No.
Indirect
Color
Hold
Delete (Deletion of display setting) Attribute Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Option
Extended tab

Trigger

16bit/32bit
5 - 31
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
• "Part Move Route" dialog box

Set the path which is used to display a part at point positions in the
specified path.
Route No. Set the Route No.
Points Set the Points
Arrange in a line
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part movement display"
POINT
• Displayed parts can be changed according to the device value.
• Display part, display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor
device value (word device) reaches a given value.
5 - 32
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value)
This function changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value.
(a) Lights/extinguishes a lamp according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).
OFF
X0 Lamp 1 Lamp 1
ON

POINT
The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed
according to ON/OFF of the bit device.
(b) Changes the lit-up color of a lamp according to the value of a word device
(D100).
(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
D100=0 D100=1 to 100 D100=100 over
D100 0 1 100 101
Off On Warning on

Range: $V==0 Lamp: 0 Blink: No
<Case(Word)>tab Range: 0<=$V<=100 Lamp: 224 Blink: No
Range: 100<$V Lamp: 224 Blink: High
POINT
The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed
according to the word device value.
5 - 33
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The lamp display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Lamp" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Device Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Shape Basic figure/ Free figure
High quality Checked/unchecked
font
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-time setting
Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)
Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.
Panelkit dialog box ...Set the figure from

Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255) parts library/panelkit.
Lamp Designation of Lamp color (0 to 255)
Background Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern (No/1 to 37).
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.

V H Designation of Size (V H)
Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.
Case(Word)
Edit Edit Display Format Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)

dialog box
Panelkit dialog box Image List dialog box
...Set the figure from ...Set the figure number.
parts library/panelkit.
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Background Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)
Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and
spacing from frame.
Delete (Deletion of display setting)
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Display setting made when conditional expression
is not applicable
Option
Extended tab

Offset Device dialog box ...Specify the device to be offset.
Expression
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Setting of Defined case
5 - 34
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Lamp Unchecked/checked
(External)
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-time setting
Shape Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.

(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up lamp display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Basic figures provided by GT Designer and the free figures set by the user can
be used as lamps.
• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of
the lamp.
• Basic figures provided by GT Designer can be used as lamps.
• A character string can be displayed in the center of the lamp.
5 - 35
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value)
This function shows a meter at the ratio of a word device value to the upper and lower
limits.
(a) Shows a meter at the ratio of a word device (D100) value to the upper limit
(300) and lower limit (0).
D100 50 100 200 150 150 150
0 300 0 300 0 300

Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1

<Basic>tab Device: D100 Text: Meter 1
<Form>tab Type: Top1/2 Upper: Fixed 300 Lower: Fixed 0
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H) 1 Upper: 300 Lower: 0
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.
POINT
• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of
the panel meter.
• Scale and scale values can be set above the arc of the panel meter.
• Scale can be set above the arc of the panel meter.
(b) Changes the needle color when the monitor device value reaches a given
value.
D100 50 100 230 150 150 150
0 300 0 300 0 300

Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1

<Basic>tab Device: D100 Needle: 255 Meter panel: 109 Text: Meter 1
<Form>tab Type: Top1/2 Upper: Fixed 300 Lower: Fixed 0
<Case>tab Range: 200<$V Needle: 0
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H) 1 Upper: 300 Lower: 0
5 - 36
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The panelmeter display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Panelmeter" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Device Device Device dialog box ...Designation of device to be monitor.

16bit/32bit
Shape Image List dialog box ...Specify the panel meter display frame.
Needle Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)
Meter panel Unchecked/checked Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)
Size Designation of Size (V H). (0.5 to 8)
Form
Type 1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/
1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle
Direciton Clockwise/Counterclockwise
Point 0 /90 /180 /270
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real/BCD
Meter frame Unchecked/checked
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Case
Extended tab
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box
Range Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Needle Specify the needle color (0 to 255)
Delete Deletion of table setting
Graph
Scale display Unchecked/checked
Scale points
Color
Scale value display Unchecked/checked
Size Designation of size (height width) of
numerical value to be displayed
Value no. Designation of number of numerical
values to be displayed (2 to 11)
Upper/Lower Designation of upper/lower limit value
to be displayed
Option Color Designation of display color of numerical
Security Setting of Security (0 to 15) value (0 to 255)
Offset Device dialog box ...Specify the device to be offset.

Expression
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Setting of Defined case
5 - 37
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ...Designation of device to be monitor.
16bit/32bit
Image List dialog box ...Specify the panel meter display frame.
Needle Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)
Meter panel Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)
Form
Type 1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/
1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle
Direciton Clockwise/Counterclockwise
Point 0 /90 /180 /270
Graph
Scale points
Color
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up panelmeter display" from
Contents of Help.
5 - 38
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4 Graph Display Functions
The graph display functions collect word device values and show them in graph format.
• Trend graph display function • Line graph display function
.... Shows data in trend graph .... Shows data in line graph
format. format.
• Bar graph display function • Statistical graph display function

.... Shows data in bar graph .... Shows the ratio of each
format. data to the total in statistical
graph format.
• Scattered chart display function • Level display function
.... Shows the X and Y axis .... Shows data as a level at
device values in scattered the ratio to upper/lower
chart format. limit.
5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph)
This function gathers data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph.
(a) Collects data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph. After the
last part of the display range is reached, the screen is scrolled.
D100 100 300 200
Scrolling at display
range end
400 400
400
300 300 300
200
200 200
100
0 100 100
1 2 3
0 0
1 2 3 1 2 3

<Basic>tab Graph: Trend <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100
Number: 1 <Graph>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 3
<Form>tab
Points: 3 (GOT-A900 series) Scale value display (V H) 1
<Others>tab : Value no.: 5 3
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: 0
(GOT-F900 series) Upper: 400 3 Lower: 0 1
5 - 39
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The trend graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Line/Trend/Bar Chart" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Graph Trend
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Form
Direciton Right/Left
Number Designation of Number (1 to 8)
Points Designation of Points (2 to 100)
Frame Checked/unchecked
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Style Designation of Style
Delete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width
16bit/32bit
Case
Graph
Extended tab
Scale Unchecked/checked
display
Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)
Scale Checked/unchecked
value display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values (V H)
to be displayed (0,2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value
Option /displayed lower limit value (V H)
Store Unchecked/checked
memory
No clear trigger/
Trigger Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
Trigger type Rise/Fall Device Device dialog box
Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) ...Set the Device No.
ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Expression
5 - 40
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Graph Trend
Form
Frame Unchecked/checked
Monitor Device
Delete Deletion of setting

16bit/32bit
Case

Others
Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H)
Trigger type Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).
Store memory No clear trigger/
Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall

(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up trend graph display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• As the condition for graphing the specified word device value, you can combine
and set the monitoring cycle and bit condition (ON/OFF).
• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed on one trend graph.
• Up to 100 pieces of collected data can be displayed on the screen.
• Scales and scale values can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.
5 - 41
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph)
This function gathers the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.
(a) Batch-collects the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.
D100 100 200 300
D101 50 0 400
D102 300 400 100
D103 0 100 0
D104 400 400 300
400
400 400
300 300 300
200
200 200
100
0 100 100
100 101 102 103 104
0 0
100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104

<Basic>tab Graph: Line <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
Number :1 <Graph>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5
<Form>tab
Points :5 (GOT-A900 series) Scale value display (V H) 1
<Others>tab : Value no.: 5 5
(GOT-F900 series) Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100
(b) When the line graph display is updated, the old graph is not erased but a new
graph is overlaid on the old one. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is
displayed)
D100 100 200 300
D101 50 0 400
D102 300 400 100
D103 0 100 0
D104 400 400 300
Cleared by
erase trigger
400
400 400 400
300 300 300 300
200
200 200 200
100
0
100 100 100
100 101 102 103 104
0 0 0
100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104

<Basic>tab Graph: Line <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
Number :1
<Form>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5
Points :5
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H)
(GOT-A900 series) : Value no.: 5 5
Locus: checked: Clear on trigger rise
<Option>tab Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100
Device (Clear trigger): X0
POINT
Note the following when setting a line graph which is specified to show a locus.
• Only one graph may be set to one project.
• It cannot be set to a window screen.
• When there is line graph setting, the window screen's overlap window 2 or test
window cannot be displayed.
• The base screen where line graph setting has been made cannot be displayed as
multiple called screens simultaneously by the screen call function.
• The maximum size of a line graph is equal to the maximum size of an overlap
window.
5 - 42
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The line graph display function consists of the following setting items.
Basic
Basic tab
Graph Line
Form
Frame Checked/unchecked
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Continuous/Random
2 Device point Unchecked/checked
Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Delete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width
Case 16bit/32bit
Graph Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Extended tab

Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)
Scale value Checked/unchecked
display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values (V H)
to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value/displayed
lower limit value (V H)
Option Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Locus Unchecked/checked ...Set the Device No.
No clear trigger
Value not unchecked/Checked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
displayed
Designation of Value not displayed
Trigger
Trigger type Rise/Fall/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Expression
Expression Input Expression dialog box ......Set the calculation expression.
5 - 43
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Graph Line
Form
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)

16bit/32bit
Case
Others
Trigger type Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).
No clear trigger/
Value not Unchecked/checked

displayed
Designation of Value not displayed
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up line graph display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Security, offset, expression and hidden values can be set.
• Up to eight graphs can be displayed.
• Up to 500 devices can be monitored with one graph.
• Up to four graphs can be displayed.
• Up to 50 devices can be monitored with one graph.
• Scales can be set.
5 - 44
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph)
This function shows data stored in word devices on a bar graph.

(a) Batch-collects the data stored in multiple word devices and shows them on a
bar graph.
D100 -200 -400 200
D101 400 300 400
D102 200 300 -400
D103 -200 100 -200
400 400
400 200 200
200 0 0
0 -200 -200
-200 -400 -400
D100 D101 D102 D103 D100 D101 D102 D103
-400
D100 D200 D300 D400
Drawn as figures/texts.

<Basic>tab Graph: Bar <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
<Form>tab Number: 4 Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5
<Graph>tab
(Vertical)
(GOT-A900 series)
Scale value display (Vertical) 1
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: -400 <Others>tab
: Value no.: 5 (Vertical)
(GOT-F900 series)
Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: -400 (Vertical)
(b) Sorts the bar graph (ascending order, descending order) according to the
word device values. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is displayed)
D100 300 200 400
D101 200 300 100
D102 400 100 200
D103 100 400 300
400 400
400 300 300
300 200 200
200 100 100
100
0

Base : Fixed 0
<Basic>tab Graph: Bar <Case>tab Upper : Fixed 400
Lower : Fixed 0
Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5
Device: D100 (Graph: 0) (Vertical)
<Monitor Device>
D101 (Graph: 3) <Graph>tab Scale value display (Vertical)
tab
D102 (Graph: 255) : Value no.: 5 (Vertical)
Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: 0 (Vertical)
<Form>tab Number: 3 <Option>tab Sort: Ascending
5 - 45
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The bar graph display function consists of the following setting items.
Basic
Basic tab
Graph Bar
Form
Direciton Vertical/Horizontal
Offset Designation of offset value (0 to 100)
Width Designation of bar width in bar graph (1 to 500)
Width + Space Designation of spacing including bar width. (1 to 500)
Frame
Monitor Device
Pattern Designation of Pattern
Background Designation of Background
16bit/32bit
Case
Base/Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Graph Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Extended tab

Scale points Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)
Scale value Unchecked/checked
display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values
to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value/
displayed lower limit value
Option Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Color
Sort Unchecked/checked
Ascending/Descending Specify the order of bar graph sorting.
Trigger
16bit/32bit
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.
5 - 46
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Graph Bar
Form
Direciton Vertical/Horizontal
Scale Position Left/Down/Right/Up
Monitor Device
16bit/32bit
Case
Base/Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Others Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up bar graph display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.
• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed.
• Graphs can be sorted in ascending/descending order.
• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.
• Up to one graph (for one device) can be displayed.
5 - 47
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph)
This function graphs the ratios of the collected word device data to the total.
(a) Collects the data of multiple word devices and shows the ratios of the word
device data to the total on a circle graph.
D0 40 20 50
D1 60 30 70
D2 70 90 40
D3 30 60 40
0 0
0
75 25 75 25 75 25
50
50 50
Graph : Circle graph Device

<Basic>tab : D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)
No. of Partitions :4
<Division>tab D1 (Graph 182, Pattern 8)
Scale display: Scale points: 4 D2 (Graph 109, Pattern 8)
<Graph>tab
Scale value display 1: Value no.: 4 D3 (Graph 0, Pattern 8)
(b) Shows the ratios of the gathered multiple word device data to the total on a
percentage bar graph.
D0 40 20 50
D1 60 30 70
D2 70 90 40
D3 30 60 40
100 100
100
50
50 50
0 0 0

Graph : Rectangle graph Device
<Basic>tab : D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)
No. of Partitions :4
<Division>tab D1 (Graph 182, Pattern 8)
Scale display: Scale points: 3 D2 (Graph 109, Pattern 8)
<Graph>tab
Scale value display 1: Value no.: 3 D3 (Graph 0, Pattern 8)
5 - 48
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The statistical graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Statistics Chart" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Graph Rectangle graph

Circle graph
No. of Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 255)
Partitions
Direciton Up/Down/Right/Left
Division
16bit/32bit
Device Continuous/ Random
Graph
Extended tab

Scale points Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)
Scale value Unchecked/checked
display
Value no. Designation of Value no.
Option
Sort Unchecked/checked
Ascending/Descending
Trigger

16bit/32bit
Expression
5 - 49
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Graph Rectangle graph
Circle graph
No. of Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 8)
Partitions
Direction Up/Right
Division

16bit/32bit
Graph
Scale points Designation of Scale points (2 to 50)
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up statistical graph display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Statistical graphs of up to 32 divisions (for 32 devices) can be displayed.
• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.
• Statistical graphs of up to eight divisions (for eight devices) can be displayed.
• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.
5 - 50
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart)
This function gathers data stored in word devices associated with the X and Y axes
and shows them on a scattered chart.
(a) Collects and shows the data of one point device. By updating the display with
the previous display remaining, shows the variation of the point device value
as a locus.
X axis device 400

D100 200 300 50 300
200
100
Y axis device 0
D200 50 200 300 0 100 200 300

<Device/Attribute> X axis Device: D100
<Basic>tab Graph : Sample
tab Y axis Device: D200
Scale display: Scale point: 5 5
X: Upper (400)
Scale value display
X: Lower (0)
<Case>tab <Graph>tab : Size: 5 5
Y: Upper (400)
Upper: 400 400
Y: Lower (0)
Lower: 0 0
(b) Batch-collects and shows the data of multiple point devices. By changing the
display switching device value, shows different data as different point figures.
X axis devices
D100 100 50
D101 250 125 400
D102 150 300 300
D103 300 350 200
100
0
Y axis devices 0 100 200 300
D200 100 300

D201 200 340
D202 250 50 Display switching device Point figures are changed
D203 300 100 D300 1 2 according to display
switching device value.

Graph : Batch
<Basic>tab
Mode : Locus Display trigger: ”Device” (D300)
<Device/Attribute>
Case1: Defined case (2==$V), Type: , Points: 4
tab
<Case(Word)>tab Color: 224 X axis Device: D100, Y axis Device: D200
Normally: Type: , Color: 255
Scale display: Scale point: 5 5
X: Upper (400)
Scale value display
X: Lower (0)
<Case>tab <Graph>tab : Size: 5 5
Y: Upper (400)
Upper: 400 400
Y: Lower (0)
Lower: 0 0
5 - 51
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The scattered chart display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Scatter Chart" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Graph Sample/Batch
Image List dialog box ......Choose the Shape.
Graph Frame Unchecked/checked
Mode Replace/Locus
Device/Attribute
Display switching Fixed/Device
Display Attribute Point/Line
Fixed Attribute Type / / / / / / /
Size Small/Medium/Large
Color 0 to 255
Points Numerical setting
16 Bit/32 Bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Device (X axis) Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Device (Y axis) Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Case
X: Upper Fixed (Numerical setting)
X: Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Y: Upper Fixed (Numerical setting)

Y: Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Case (Bit)
ON Type / / / / / / /
Color 0 to 255
OFF Type / / / / / / /
Color 0 to 255
Case (Word)
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Set the display range, type, size and color.
(Setting for each case)
Delete
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Set the display range, type, size and color.
(Ordinary)
5 - 52
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Graph
Extended tab
Scale display Checked Scale points

/unchecked
Color
Scale value display Size, Value No., Upper, Lower, Color
Option
Security
Offset Checked Device Device dialog box
/unchecked ...Set the Device No.
Store memory Checked/unchecked
Clear trigger Checked Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
/unchecked
Value not X: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting) ...Set the Device No.
displayed
Y: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting)
Operation at frequency Interrupt

over time Initialize and continue
Accumulate/Average Checked Writing interval
/unchecked Device Device dialog box
Trigger ...Set the Device No.
Trigger Type Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/Rise/Fall/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling

...Set the Device No.
Expression Initial display
Expression Input Expression dialog box ......Set the calculation expression.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up scattered chart display" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The scattered chart display function allows up to 24 points to be set on one
screen.
• Make setting to avoid a superimpose window to be overlaid on the scattered chart
which is not stored into memory.
If it is overlaid, the overlaid scattered chart part is erased.
5 - 53
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level)
This function shows a word device value as a level at the ratio to the upper/ lower limit.
(a) Shows a word device value as a level in any closed figure at the ratio to the
upper/lower limit.
D100 100 200 300

Upper: 300
<Basic>tab Device: D100 <Form>tab
Lower: 0
(b) Used with the numerical display function (refer to Section 5.1.1) or comment
display function (refer to Section 5.2.1). 1
25 98

1: On an object of the numerical or comment display function, set the drawing mode (transparent/XOR) which is used to superimpose the
object on the level display.
POINT
• Level display can be overlapped with a value or comment of the numerical or
comment display function.
However, only one value or comment may be overlapped with one level display of
the level display function.
• A value or comment shown on a level display does not blink (flicker).
5 - 54
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The level display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Level" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab

16bit/32bit
Boundary Set the device value range. (0 to 255)
Level Designation of Level (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern (0 to 255)
Form
Direction Right/Left/Up/Down

Uppe/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Case Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Extended tab
Edit E Edit
‰ ‚ ^ Display
Ö ‚ ^ Format
¶ Ö ‚ ^ dialog
ã Ö ‰
º Ö‚ box Range Edit range dialog box
...Set the device range.
Level Designation of Level (0 to 255)
Option (0 to 255)
Security Setting of Security

Trigger

16bit/32bit

Expression
5 - 55
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up level display" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
• A level can be displayed at top, bottom, left or right of a figure.
• The level display color and filling pattern can be changed when the monitor device
value reaches a given value.
5 - 56
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device
Value Change and Screen Switching)
The touch functions are designed to perform the following operations when the
corresponding touch keys are touched.
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Function name Operation Refer to
series series
Bit function Turns the bit device ON/OFF by touching the key. (a)
Word function Changes the word device value by touching the key. (b)
Base switching function Switches the base screen by touching the key. (c), (d), (e), (f),
Window switching function Switches the window screen by touching the key. (g)
Switches to the extended function screen such as ladder monitor or test
Extended function (h)
window by touching the key.
Station switching function Switches the station by touching the key. (i)
Creation of numerical/ASCII input
Creates the key for numerical or ASCII input. (j)
key

(a) Turns a bit device ON/OFF.
By changing the operation type, any of the following four operations can be
performed.
Bit SET
Bit
When touched, the

specified bit turns ON.
<Action>tab Bit Device: X1 Action: Set
Bit RST
Bit
When touched, the

specified bit turns OFF.
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Reset
Bit ALT
Bit
ON OFF
OFF ON
When touched, the currently

specified bit status is reversed.
<Action>tab Bit Device: X3 Action: Alternate
Bit momentary
Bit
Only while touched, the

specified bit turns ON.
<Action>tab Bit Device: X4 Action: Momentary
5 - 57
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) Changes the word device value.

By changing the operation type, any of the following three operations can be
performed.
Fixed Fixed value 20
D100
100 20
Touching writes
the specified value.

<Action>tab Word Device: D101 Action: Fixed (20)
Device
D100 200
D102
100 200
Touching writes the present
value of the specified word
device.

<Action>tab Word Device: D102 Action: Device (D100)
Fixed + device Fixed + D100

100 + 30 = 130
D103
100 130
Touching writes the present value
of the specified word device +
the fixed value.

<Action>tab Word Device: D103 Action: Fixed (100) + Device (D100)
(c) Switches to the specified base screen.
Base screen
switching device Base screen No. 1
1 10
Base screen No. 10
Specified value: 10 Base screen of the

specified value appears.

<Action>tab Base Basic Next screen: Fixed (10)
POINT
• Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window
screens to be switched.
• By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.
Base screen No.1 Base screen No.1
Window screen No. 1 Window screen No. 2
5 - 58
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(d) Turning the specified bit device ON/OFF switches between two different base
screens.
Base screen When OFF When ON
switching device Base screen No. 10
When X0 is ON
10 15 Base screen Base screen
When X0 is OFF No. 20 No. 15
10 20
When X0 is ON: 15/OFF: 20 Base screen Base screen
No. 20 appears. No. 15 appears.
Base Basic Next screen: Device (X0)
<Action>tab
Action ON: No. (15) OFF: No. (20)
POINT
(e) Switches the base screens according to the present value of the specified
word device.
Base screen When
switching device 1 D100 10 D100=100 D100>0 normal
1 New value Base screen No. 10
depends on
comparison Base screen Base screen Base screen Base screen
expression. No. 10 No. 20 No.30 No.80
When 1 D100 10 : 10 Base screen Base screen Base screen Base screen
When D100=100 : 20 No. 10 No. 20 No. 30 No. 80
When D100>0 : 30 appears appears appears appears
When normal : 80

Base Basic Next screen: Device (D100)
Action Range: 1<=$$<=10 No.: 10
<Action>tab :$$=100 No.: 20
:0<$$ No.: 30
:Normally No.: 80
POINT
• Up to 64 different comparison expressions (including those for normal setting)
may be set.
(f) Switches to the higher-level base screen.

Base screen
switching
device Base screen No. 20 Base screen No. 15
20 15 More previous
base screen
Previous base screen Base screen No. 15

No.: 15 appears

<Action>tab Base Basic Next screen: Previous
5 - 59
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
POINT
• The GOT stores up to 10 higher-levels of base screen Nos. which had been
displayed up to now. Therefore, the base screens can be switched according to
the history.
1
<Screen switching transition>
: Touch key for switching to specified

2 3 4 screen is touched
: Touch key for switching to higher
level is touched
1 3 5 3 1
5 6 7 8 9
• The level information is made invalid when the GOT is powered off.
Note that if you switch power off, then on again on any midway level, the screen
displayed first will be on the top level.
(g) Closes a window screen.

Base screen
switching device Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1
0 1 0
Window screen
No. 1
Specified value: 1 Specified value: 0

Window Basic Next screen: Fixed (1)
<Action>tab
Window Basic Next screen: Fixed (0)
POINT
By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.
(h) Starts the ladder monitor function (e.g. extended function).

P0 M999 K
187 MOV 1 D1
K K
- 1234 D100 MOV 2 D2
RST V
K
MOV 90 D162
K
MOV 110 D167
K
MOV 100 D172
SET M9028
K K
DUTY 350 400 M9020
D1 D2 V D162 D167 D172
1 2 47 90 110 100
Ladder monitor
function appears.

<Action>tab Exlended Extended action: Ladder monitor
POINT
The touch key (extended) function can be used to set the following different items.
• Utility • Ladder monitor • Key window
• System monitor • Test window • Special function
monitor
• Start hardcopy • Abort hardcopy • Password
• Clock setting • Clean screen • Network monitor
• Brightness adjustment • List editor
Setting is not allowed when A95 GOT is used.
5 - 60
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(i) Performs the station switching function.

The station switching function allows multiple stations to be monitored on the
same screen by switching the object device currently monitored on the data
link/network system to the same device of a different station.
1) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number.
Monitoring the Monitoring the

host station other station
NW No. : 2
Station No.
: 10
Specified station number

Other station NW No. : 2
Station No. : 10

<Action>tab Station No. Basic Next station: Other (NW No.: 2 Station No.: 10)
2) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number according

to ON/OFF of the specified bit device.
When OFF When ON
Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the
host station other station other station
Station No.: 5 Station No.: 15
Station No. 5 appears. Station No. 15 appears.

When X0 is ON : Station No. 15
When OFF. : Station No. 5

Station No. Basic Next station: Device(X0)
<Action>tab
Action ON: Station No.(15) OFF: Station No.(5)
3) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number when the
present value of the specified word device corresponds to the set
comparison expression.
When
1 D100 100 101 D100 300 normal
Monitoring the
host station Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the
other station other station host station
Station No.: 5 Station No.: 10
When 1 D100 100 : Station No. 5 Station No. 5 appears. Station No. 10 appears. No switching
When 101 D100 300 : Station No. 10
When normal : No switching

Station No. Basic Next station: Device (D100)
Action Range: 1<=$$<=100 Switching type: Other Station No.5
<Action>tab
: 101<=$$<=300 Switching type: Other Station No.10
: Normally Switching type: Host
5 - 61
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(j) Creates keys for numerical and ASCII inputs.
Type
ABCD 123
A Key code: 0061H 1 Key code: 0031H
B Key code: 0062H 2 Key code: 0032H
<Action>tab C Key code: 0063H 3 Key code: 0033H
D Key code: 0064H Key code: 000DH
Key code: 002DH
POINT
• Refer to Appendix 3 for details of key codes.
• Numerical and ASCII input keys are supplied in the template of GT Designer.
5 - 62
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The touch key function consists of the following setting items.
• "Touch key" dialog box
Basic
Display Key/ Bit/ Word
Basic tab
trigger
Range Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Shape No/ Basic figure/ Free figure
Switch area reverse Unchecked/checked
High quality font
Buzzer Always set/Set only fill requirements/Always not set
Case
ON/OFF Shape (Basic figure) Image List dialog box Choose the Shape.
(Free figure) Panelkit dialog box Choose the Shape.

Switch Designation of Switch (0 to 255)
Text ON Text/
Direct Text dialog box ...Set the touch key text.
OFF Text
Indirect Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Fixed ON/Off (Numerical setting)
Preview No. Setting of Comment No.
(To the following page)
5 - 63
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(From the previous page)
Action
Bit Key Action (Bit) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Action Set/ Alternate/

Reset/ Momentary
Word Key Action (Word) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/
16bit/32bit Real
Type Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to
word device.
Indirect Device Device dialog box
Initial value Condition value

condition Reset value
Key Action (Extended Key) Utility/Key Window/Test Window/Start hardcopy/
Extended Extended
dialog box Password/Clean screen/Change Brightness/
action
Ladder monitor/System monitor/Special function
monitor/Abort hardcopy/Clock setting/Network monitor
Key Action (Base switching) Basic
Base /List editor
dialog box Previous
Fixed Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the
Screen.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

Action /Word (BCD16)
(for bit)
No. Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the
Hold Screen.
Action (for word)
...Set the conditional expression and switching
method.
Delete Deletion of operation
Up/Down Move operation sequence up/down
Basic ...Set the switching method for the case where
Window Key Action (Window conditional expression is not applicable.
switching) dialog box Next Fixed
screen
...Setting of Device
No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/
Word (BCD16)
Type Overlap Window1/Overlap
Window2/Superimpose Window
Action (for bit)
Same as the settings of Operation setting Action (for bit)

tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box
Action (for word)
Same as the settings of Operation setting Action

(for word) tab in
(To the following page) Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box
5 - 64
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(From the previous page)
Key Action (Switching Basic

Station
Station No.) dialog box Host
No.
Other NW No.
Station No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16) /

Word (BCD16)
Action (For bit)
Host
Other NW No.
Station No.
Hold
Action (For word)
Same as the settings of Operation setting Action (for word)

tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box
Edit Change the setting.
Key code Set the Key code
Option
Extended tab
Security (Display) Specify of Security (0 to 15)

Security (input) Specify of Security (0 to 15)
Simultaneous press On preference/ Off preference
Delay No/
ON/OFF/Press twice
Attribute for middle Shape Choose the Shape
of two presses Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
(0 to 255)
Text Text dialog box
Edit key group Checked/unchecked
Offset Unchecked/checked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge
16bit/32bit

5 - 65
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Display Key
trigger Bit Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Shape No
Basic figure
Case
(ON/OFF)
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.
Text Text dialog box ...Set the touch key text.
Action Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.
Bit Key Action (Bit) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Action Set/Alternate/Reset/Momentary
Word Key Action (Word) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Type Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to
word device.
Indirect Device Device dialog box
Initial value Condition value

condition
Reset value
Key Action (Base switching) Basic

Base Previous
dialog box
Edit Change the setting. Fixed Screen Image dialog box

...Choose the Screen.
Key code Set the Key code.
Option/Trigger
Simultaneous Unchecked/checked
press
Trigger type Ordinary
ON/OFF Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Auto repeat Unchecked/checked
5 - 66
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up touch key" "Setting up touch key" from Contents of Help.
POINT
• Security can be set to display/hide data and to enable/disable the touch key.
• Idling period from when the key is touched until operation starts (set period,
touch again) can be set in increments of one second with a minimum value of
one second. (Delay setting)
• Setting can be made to disable touch keys from being touched simultaneously.
• The following multiple functions can be set to one touch key. If the touch key is
set as an extended key, multiple functions cannot be set.
Operation priority
Function Quantity under multiple
setting
Bit momentary 20 High
Bit SET 20
Bit RST 20
Bit ALT 20
Word SET 20
Base screen switching 1
Window screen switching (overlap window 1) 1
Window screen switching (overlap window 2) 1
Window screen switching (superimpose window) 1
Station switching 1 Low
5 - 67
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.6 Data Input Functions

The data input functions write any data to devices.
• Numerical input function ..............Writes any value to a device.
• ASCII input function .....................Writes any key code to word devices.
5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)
This function writes any value to the specified word device.

(a) Writes any value to a word device (D100).
D100 100 1000
D100 100 D200 100 D100 100
0 D200 100 D100 1000 D200 100
0
Key window Key window
Touch an input area to Numerical input Move the cursor to the

display the input key next input area.
window.
(b) You can change the display color and attributes when entering a given value
to the monitor device. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Temperature target value Temperature target value Temperature target value

Temperature target value
58
Key window
58 -20 125

Device: D0 Case1: Defined case ($W<0), Numeral: 255
<Basic>tab <Case>tab
Shape: checked Case2: Defined case (100<$W), Numeral:0, Plate: 255
(c) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple
numerical input areas.
A 100 B 0 A 550
0 B 0 A 550 B 0 A 550 B 3
C 200 Key window Key window D 180

5 Key window D 185
C 200 D 50 D 50
0 C 200 C 200
Input cursor moving path Numerical input Numerical input Numerical input
Move the input cursor to D. Move the input cursor to B. Move the input cursor to C.
Item Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings
Numerical User ID: 1
<Basic>tab Device: D101 <Option>tab
Input A Move destination ID: 4
Input B Move destination ID: 3
Input C Move destination ID: 1
Numerical
Input D User ID: 4
<Option>tab
Screen auxiliary Move destination ID: 2
Common Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order
setting
5 - 68
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(d) Controls the input cursor position on the PLC CPU side and also develops the
device value whose numerical input has been established into other control.
Use the system information function to make sure that the numerical input has
been established.
Under the conditions of the "numerical input number storage area" and
"numerical input signal" data, develop the numerical input value into other
control.
[System information function devices used in this setting example]
Item Description
D6: Numerical input number storage area Stores the user ID of the established numerical input function.
D2.b4: Numerical input signal Turns ON when the numerical input is established.
D1.b4: Numerical input completion signal Turns ON to turn OFF the numerical input signal.
M1 OFF ON D101 0 100

A 0 B 0 A 0
100 B 0
M2 OFF D6 0 1
M3 OFF C 0 D
Key window
0 D2.b4 OFF ON C 0 0
D window
Key
M4 OFF
When M1 turns ON, the operation Numerical input When numerical input is established, D6 and D2.b4 make
condition of numerical input A is enabled (Write to D101) changes. Under conditions of their data, develop the D101
to display the cursor and key window. value into other control.
Use the key window to enter and establish D6 : Stores the user ID (1) of the established numerical input.
the value. D2.b4: Turns ON the numerical input signal of the system
information.
M1 ON OFF A 100 B 0
D2.b4 ON OFF D1.b4 OFF ON
M2 OFF
M3 OFF C 0 D 0 D1.b4 ON OFF D2.b4 ON OFF
M4 OFF
When M1 turns OFF, the cursor and key window disappear. After making sure that D2.b4 After developing the D101
Until the operation condition (M1 to M4) of numerical input is turned OFF, turn OFF D1.b4. value into other control, turn
enabled (ON), the cursor and key window do not appear. ON D1.b4 to turn OFF D2.b4.
D1.b4: Turns ON to turn OFF the
numerical input signal of the
system information.

Numerical <Basic>tab Device: D101
<Option>tab User ID: 1
Input A <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M1
Input B <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M2
Input C <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M3
Input D <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M4
Action when condition success:
Project Auxiliary Setting Display cursor and key window. System Information Read device: D1
Common
dialog box Action when condition fail: dialog box Write device: D2
Erase cursor, key window and input object.
POINT
Refer to Section 5.8.2 for details of the system information function.
5 - 69
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The numerical input function consists of the following setting items.
• " Numerical Input" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab

Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.
Plate Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)
Text/Text and Plate
Form
Format Signed Decimal/Unsigned Decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Disp all digits Unchecked/checked
Expression
Mask None/AND
Extended tab

Monitor word Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
Write word Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
Case (Setting for each case)
Set Edit Display Format dialog box
Delete
...Set the display attribute changing conditional expression and display attribute.
Option
Security (Display)
Security (Input)
Write device Unchecked/checked
User ID Unchecked/checked
Set the User ID.
Move Unchecked/checked
destination ID Set the Move destination ID.
Trigger Screen Setting Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.

16bit/32bit

5 - 70
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Form
Format Signed decimal/UnSigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Disp all digits Unchecked/checked
Others
Upper Fixed Setting of Fixed
Lower Fixed Setting of Fixed
Setting of User ID No.
Move Unchecked/checked
destination ID Setting of Move destination ID No.
Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box

.........Confirmation key operation setting
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up numerical input" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
• The system key window of the GOT is available for value input. (Input keys
can be created freely.)
• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's
system window.
• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window
only.
5 - 71
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)
This function writes any key code to the specified word devices.
(a) Writes any key code to word devices, starting from the specified one (D100).
D100 4241 H (BA)

1 ABC 2 ABC 1 ABC
C 2 ABC 1 CDEF 2 ABC
C
D101 0043 H ( C)
1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL D100 4443 H (DC)

C D E F ESC
CCCC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CCCC D101 4645 H (FE)
Touch an input area to Text input Move the cursor to the

display the cursor for input. next input area.

(b) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple
ASCII input areas.
A 123 B ABC A FED

D B ABC A FED B ABC A FED B 321
1
C CDE D 45 C CDE D 45 C CDE D CBA

A C CDE D CBA
1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL
C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC
Input cursor moving path Text input Text input Text input
Move the input cursor to D. Move the input cursor to B. Move the input cursor to C.

User ID: 1
Ascii Input A <Basic>tab Device: D10 <Option>tab
Move destination ID: 4
User ID: 2
Ascii Input B <Basic>tab Device: D20 <Option>tab
User ID: 3
Ascii Input C <Basic>tab Device: D30 <Option>tab
Ascii Input D <Basic>tab Device: D40

User ID: 4
<Option>tab
Screen auxiliary Move destination ID: 2
Common Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order
setting
5 - 72
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The ASCII input function consists of the following setting items.
• " Ascii Input" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab
Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.

Text/Text and Plate
Form
Size(Height width size setting)

Digits(Digit count setting)
Option
Security (Display)
Extended tab
Security (Input)
Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Device Set the User ID.
Move destination ID Unchecked/checked
Device Set the Move destination ID.
Screen Setting Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.
Trigger
16bit/32bit
Device Device dialog box ...Set the DeviceNo.

5 - 73
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Basic
Form

Alignment Left/Right/Center
Option
Setting of User ID No.
Move destin. Unchecked/checked
Setting of Move destination ID No.
Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box

.........Confirmation key operation setting
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up ASCII input" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
• Input keys can be created freely.
• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input
area can be set freely.
• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's
system window (10-key pad).
• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window
(10-key pad) only.
• Input keys can be created freely.
• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input
area can be set freely.
5 - 74
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)
This function gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer
memory of a special function module every time a data collection trigger occurs, or
prints numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON/OFF.
(a) Gathers and prints data per data collection trigger. (Real-time report)
The current data and next data are printed continuously without the printer
paper page being renewed.
Device states Device states

OFF
D100: Device used to monitor processed products in line 1
D100 10 D100 50 D101: Device used to monitor processed products in line 2
X10 D101 20 D101 60 D102: Device used to monitor processed products in line 3
ON D102 30 D102 70 D103: Device used to monitor processed products in line 4
D103 40 D103 80
[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.

Texts and table
00/08/02 16:53:24 1 are drawn with
report figures.
Production List
Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
Every time collection trigger X10 turns Products Line 1 10pcs. Line 3 30pcs. Set as repeat
ON, device values of D100 to D103 Line 2 20pcs. Line 4 40pcs. lines.
are gathered and printed. Products Line 1 50pcs. Line 3 70pcs.
Line 2 60pcs. Line 4 80pcs.
Products 115pcs.
Line 2 100pcs. Line 4
Set print objects (values).

Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)
Report style : Real/cont.
Edit Parameter dialog box <Format/Trigger tab>tab Page No. : print (at right top)
Collect trigger type : Rise (X10)
Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.
Device : D100 to D103
Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab
Print style : Unsigned decimal
Digits :3
5 - 75
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) Gathers and stores data onto the PC card per data collection trigger. Then,
prints the data stored on the PC card when a print trigger occurs. (Logging
report)
Before printing, the printer paper page is renewed.
Device states Device states
D100: Device used to monitor processed products in line 1
D103 40 D103 80
OFF ON Every time collection trigger X10 turns ON, device

values of D100 to D103 are gathered and stored onto
X10 PC card.
Collection trigger occurs.
Report data file
PC card Data stored when the first

data collection trigger
occurred
Print trigger occurs. Data stored when the
second data collection
OFF ON trigger occurred
X100
Every time print trigger X100
turns ON, collected data stored
on PC card are printed.
[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.
Production List Texts and table are drawn with

report figures.
Printed when print Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
trigger turns ON Line 1 10pcs. Line 3 30pcs.
second time Products 20pcs. Line 4 40pcs. Set as repeat lines.
Line 2
Products Line 2 80pcs.
60pcs. Line 4
Set print objects (values).

Production List
Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
Printed when print
trigger turns ON Products Line 1 90pcs. Line 3 105pcs.
first time
Products Line 2 135pcs.
120pcs. Line 4

Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)
Report style : Log/page
Page No. : Not print
<Format/Trigger tab>tab
Collect trigger type : Rise (X10)
Print trigger : Rise (X100)
Edit Parameter dialog box
Report num. :1
Sampling num. :2
<Log>tab
Over processing : Overwrite
Delete trigger type : Print
Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.
Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab Device : D100 to D103
Print style : Unsigned decimal Digits: 3
5 - 76
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The report function consists of the following setting items.
• [Report Common Setting] dialog box
Make setting used commonly to all report screens.
Change page (before print) Unchecked/checked
Trigger watch cycle Set the trigger monitoring cycle (1 to 60)
Abort trigger type None/
Rise/Fall
Initialize change page after aborting Unchecked/checked

Print Format Print Format dialog box ...Lines, Columns, Margin
• [Edit Parameter] dialog box

Set the report type and operations to each report screen.
Format/Trigger
Report style Real/cont. / Log/page
Page No. Print (at right top) /Not print
Time Not print/at center top/at left top/at right top
Collect trigger type Sampling ( Setting of Sampling cycle (3 to 3600) )
Rise/Fall Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Print trigger Rise/Fall Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Log
Report num. Set the repeat count of repeated row at print trigger occurrence.
Sampling num. Set the number of times when collected data is stored onto PC card.
Over processing Overwrite/break
Logging Oldest/Latest
Delete trigger type Rise/Fall/ Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Turn on/Print
File name Set the file name stored onto PC card.
• [Numerical Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the numerical data
to be printed on report paper.
Basic
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Print style SignedDecimal/UnsignedDecimal/Hexadecimal/Binary/Real
Right alignment/Left alignment
Digits Specify the number of digits to be printed (1 to 13).
Disp. all digits
Decimal point Specify the decimal fraction part to be displayed (0 to 32).
Expression
5 - 77
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
• [Comment Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the comment data
to be printed on report paper.
Basic
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

Print digits Set the number of digits to be printed (1 to 255).
Comment No. (bit)...Set the comment number of ON/OFF.
Expression
• [Header/Repeat Range] dialog box

Set the header (title, etc.) range on the report screen and the range where
printing will be repeated per data collection trigger.
Header range Set Unchecked/checked
Repeat range Start/ End Start/ End
End
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Report Function" "Introduction-Report Function" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The report function is not available for the A950 handy GOT.
• When using the report function, always install the extended function operating
system (report) into the GOT.
• You can print the numerical data of word devices and special function module's
buffer memory in decimal or hexadecimal.
• You can print numerical data and comments associated with bit ON/OFF.
• You can print the rules and characters drawn on the report screen. It should be
noted that the report screen displays all rules in continuous line but vertical rules
are actually printed as "-----".
• You can register data of up to eight reports (eight report screens) to a single
project.
• You can set up to 256 points of print objects (values, comments) on a single
report screen.
• You can perform data operations.
• The logging report cannot be used on the A95 GOT.
• To print the report on the A95 GOT, the printer interface unit must be installed.
5 - 78
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8 Other Object Functions
This section explains the objects which have various functions other than the monitor
and data input functions. There are the following other object functions.
• Hardcopy function.....................Prints a displayed monitor screen on a printer.
• System information function .....Confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU.
• Observe status function............Writes to the PLC CPU when a condition is enabled.
• Floating alarm function .............Causes comments associated with ON bit devices to flow from right to left on
a base screen.
• Recipe function .........................Writes the specified data to devices or writes and saves device values in the
specified device range to a PC card.
• Sound function ..........................Plays the touch sound of a touch key or a sound (sound file in WAV form) in
the observe status function.
• Test function..............................Shows a test window during monitor screen display to allow a device value to
be changed.
• Barcode function.......................Writes the data read with a barcode reader to the PLC CPU.
• Operation panel function ..........Enables operation from an external operation panel connected to the GOT.
• Time action function..................Performs device write or similar operations at the specified times of day on the
specified days of week.
• Sampling function .....................Gathers data at specified intervals or on bit condition and shows them as a
graph.
• Script function ...........................Controls a GOT display under the GOT side program (script).
5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file)
This function prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer or saves it onto
a PC card.
(a) Prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer according to
ON/OFF of a bit device.
Start trigger occurs.
OFF ON
X10 D10 10
No. 25
D20 20
D10 10
No. 25
D20 20

Hardcopy dialog box Start trigger: X10
POINT
• When the specified bit device is turned ON to trigger a hardcopy start, hold the
specified bit device ON for longer than the preset monitor time.
• When the touch key function is used to turn ON the hardcopy starting trigger, set
the operation type to "Bit SET" or "Bit ALT". If you set it to "Bit momentary", the
hardcopy function is not performed.
5 - 79
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) Saves the current monitor screen of the GOT onto a PC card in BMP format.
Instead of a bit device, a touch key (extended) may also be used to determine
the save timing. (Both the PC card saving and touch key (extended) functions
may be used only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Saved as BMP file.
No. 10
PC card No. 10
Touch the touch key (extended). 1

Hardcopy dialog box Target: PC card (PCMCIA)
1: Set the operation setting of the touch key to the extended (hardcopy) function.
(2) Setting items

The hardcopy function consists of the following setting items.
• "Hardcopy" dialog box
Target Printer
PC card (PCMCIA)
The minimum number's Unchecked/checked

file is deleted when
capacity is exceeded and
make initial state when
the maximum is filed.
Print mode Monochrome
Color
Rev. /Norm Unchecked/checked
Change page Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting
Start trigger Unchecked/checked
Abort trigger Unchecked/checked

Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle.
5 - 80
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Rev. /Norm Unchecked/checked
Change page Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting (1 to 4)
Start trigger Unchecked/checked
Abort trigger Unchecked/checked

Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Hardcopy" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The hardcopy function is not available for the A950 handy GOT.
• When using the hardcopy function, always install the extended function
operating system (ESC printer/PCL printer) to the GOT.
• Using the following hardcopy functions on the A95 GOT requires the
corresponding option modules to be fitted.
For PC card storage: Memory card interface unit
For printout: Printer interface unit
• The hardcopy function is not available for the F930GOT.
5 - 81
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU)
This function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU or transmits the
information on the GOT900 series operating status from the PLC CPU to the GOT.
(a) Reads information on the GOT operating status from the PLC CPU and
controls the GOT operating status.
1) Read device (D10) data is changed. 2) Read device data is confirmed. 3) Display is cleared according to
the new data of read device
(D10.b1: ON).
(Forced screen saver enable
signal ON)
When bit turns ON, screen No. 25
save status is forcibly chosen.
D10 b2 b1 b0
OFF ON

System Information dialog
Read device: D10
box
POINT
The GOT reads the following GOT operation states from the PLC CPU.
• Automatic screen saver disable signal • Forced screen saver enable signal 1
• Key code read completion signal • Numerical input read completion
• Barcode input disable signal signal 1
• Key-in disable signal • Barcode input read completion signal
• Hardcopy monochrome print signal • Hardcopy setting enable signal
• GOT error reset signal • Hardcopy reverse video signal
• Buzzer output signal • External I/O function's output signal
area
• Buzzer one-shot output signal
( 1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible)
(b) Writes the GOT operating status to the PLC CPU.

1) GOT display screen is changed from base screen 1 to 2. 2) As the GOT operating status changed, new data is written to
the write device.
Display screen number is stored into the
write device.
When GOT-A900 series is used
D22 (displayed base screen number
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 storage area)
When GOT-F900 series is used
D20 (displayed base screen number
storage area)

System Information dialog
Write device: D20
box
5 - 82
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
POINT
The following information can be written to the PLC CPU every time the GOT
operating status changes.
• GOT error code • PC card battery error detection signal
• On base screen number 1 • GOT ready signal
• On window screen number • Key code input signal
• Numerical value input number • Numerical value input signal 1
• Current cursor position 1 • Previous cursor position
• Hardcopy output signal • Key code input signal
• Recipe processing signal • Previous numerical value input
• GOT error detection signal • Current numerical value input
• Printer error detection signal • Cursor position numeric value input
• Barcode input signal 1 • Hardcopy sub-signal
• Human sensor detection signal • Report output signal
• Currently printed report number • Grip switch hold-down status
(A950 handy GOT, F940 handy GOT
only)
( 1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible)
(2) Setting items

The system information function consists of the following setting items.
• "System Information" dialog box
Read device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Device points Setting of Device points (1 to 2)
Write device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up GOT Action (System
information)" from Contents of Help.
5 - 83
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is
enabled)
This function writes data to the PLC CPU or performs GOT operation when the
specified condition is enabled, e.g. when the specified bit device turns ON/OFF or the
specified word device value falls within the specified range (only when the GOT-A900
series is used). Two modes are available in this function: to perform write/operation
when the specified condition is enabled, independently of the display monitor screen
(per project); and to perform write/operation for each display screen when the specified
condition is enabled (per screen).
(a) When the specified bit device X1 turns ON (condition), writes 100 to D10 (write).
X1 D10 0
D10 100
OFF
ON
When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes it. When condition is enabled, 100 is written
to word device D10 of PLC CPU.
Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog
<Trigger>tab Trigger 1: ON Device: X1
box
<Project>tab Action : Word set (16bit)
<Action>tab Device : D10
Fixed : 100
POINT
• The observe status function can perform the following write/operation.
• Turn ON a bit device only while the condition is enabled. (Momentary)
• Turn ON a bit device. (Bit SET)
• Turn OFF a bit device. (Bit RST)
• Reverse the current status of a bit device. (Bit ALT)
• Write a value to a word device. (Word SET)
• Play a sound file with an external speaker. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
(b) When the value of the specified word device D100 falls within the the
specified range (100 or more) (condition), turns OFF X10 (write). (Only when
the GOT-A900 series is used)
When D100 value rises to or above 100, condition set to When condition is enabled (D100 value rises to or above 100),
GOT is enabled. bit device X10 of PLC CPU is turned OFF.
X10
D100 26
D100 100 ON
Current temperature Current temperature
: 26 : 100
Operating status Operating status
Operating Standby OFF

Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog
<Trigger>tab Trigger 1: Word Range Device: D100 Range: D100>=100
box
<Project>tab Action : Reset
<Action>tab
Device : X10
5 - 84
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The observe status function consists of the following setting items.
• "Observe Status" dialog box
Project
Add Trigger/Action dialog box
Trigger
Trigger 1/
ON/OFF/Word Range
Trigger 2
Data length 16Bit/32Bit
Operator ==/</<=/!=/>=/>
Constant Constant setting
Action Delete (Condition 2 only)
Action Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit) /

Sound
Sound Setting of Sound Sound File List dialog box
...Choose the Sound File.
Storing device Points Setting of Points (1 to 40)
Device Device dialog box/Multiple Device dialog box
Fixed Unchecked/checked Setting of Fixed
Indirect Unchecked/
Device
checked Device
dialog box
Edit ...Set the Device No.
Delete FMOV/BMOV
Observe cycle Ordinary
Sampling Setting of Sampling
Screen
Screen type Base screen/Window screen
No./Browse Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the Screen.
Trigger
Trigger 1/ Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for
Trigger 2 Project tab setting
Action
Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for

Project tab setting
Edit
Sampling Setting of Sampling
Delete
5 - 85
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Project
Trigger
Trigger 1/ ON/OFF
Trigger 2
Action
Action Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit)
Storing device Points Setting of Points (1 to 40)
Device dialog box/

Device ...Setting of Device No.
Multiple Device dialog box
Fixed...Set the fixed value to be written to word device.
Indirect Unchecked/checked
FMOV/BMOV
Edit
Delete
Sampling Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)
Screen
Base screen No./Browse Screen Image dialog box ... Choose the Base screen.
Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for

Project tab setting
Edit
Delete
Sampling Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)
5 - 86
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Status Observation
Function" from Contents of Help.
POINT
• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.
• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.
• Up to 512 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each
project and each screen (up to 512 points per screen).
• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object
display on the GOT screen.
Monitoring operation takes longer as the total number of condition device
points increase or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.
• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.
• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.
• Up to 40 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each
project and each screen (up to 40 points per screen).
• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object
display on the GOT screen.
Monitoring operation takes longer as the condition bit device points increase
(the number of device points will be up to 80 if project-based or screen-based
settings overlap) or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.
5 - 87
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen)
This function causes comments associated with multiple bit devices to flow from right
to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit
devices which are ON.
Comments keep flowing until the ON bit devices turn OFF.
(a) When a bit device X1 turns ON, a comment indicating error occurrence
associated with the bit device X1 flows.
X1 Error
OFF D100 10
Error
ON
Error
Left Right

Floating Alarm dialog box Device: X1
Screen Auxiliary
Carry out display of alarm flow: checked
Setting dialog box
(b) When comments are associated with multiple bit devices, the comments flow
from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments
corresponding to the bit devices which are ON, and how many monitoring bit
devices are currently ON is also checked.
Indicates how many monitor devices
are ON using numerical display
object. 1
Line 3 error Error
Number of errors
6 Line
3 error Error
Error Line 1 error

Left Right

Device points : 8
Floating Alarm dialog box Continuous device : X1
Storage device D10
Screen Auxiliary
Carry out display of alarm flow: checked
Setting dialog box
1: Set the numerical display monitor devices to the occurrence count storage device (D10).
5 - 88
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The floating alarm function consists of the following setting items.
• "Floating Alarm" dialog box
Device points
Storage device Unchecked/checked
Comment No. Browse Comment List dialog box
Size ...Register the comment.
Delete

Device points
Comment No. Browse Comment List dialog box ...Register the comment.
Size
Delete
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Floating Alarm
Function" from Contents of Help.
POINT
• Devices to be monitored are common to all screens, but whether floating alarms
are displayed or not can be set for each base screen.
• Floating alarms appear at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 89
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range)
This function writes/reads device values to/from the specified devices of the PLC CPU
on the specified condition (device ON/OFF).
The read data are stored as indicted below depending on whether the GOT is the
GOT-A900 series or GOT-F900 series.
• GOT-A900 series: Stored onto a PC card in CSV format (except A950 handy GOT)
• GOT-F900 series: Stored into the GOT.
(a) Turns ON the specified device X1 at a machining start or the like to write the
initial device values of the PLC CPU from the GOT.
1) Specified device
(write trigger) X1 turns ON.
X1
OFF
ON D10 10 D10 10
D11 20 D11 20
D12 30 D12 30 2) Device values are written
D13 40 D13 40 to specified devices of
PLC CPU.

<Operation Device: D10
Recipe Contents>tab Device points: 4
Attribute Trigger 1
<Write Trigger>tab
dialog X1 ON time
box <Recipe Recipe Device
Device>tab D10: 10, D11: 20, D12: 30, D13: 40
POINT
Device values may also be written to the specified devices of the PLC CPU from a
PC card fitted to the GOT. (Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950
handy GOT) is used)
5 - 90
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) Turns ON the specified device X2 at a machining end or the like to store the
specified device values at machining end onto a PC card.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)
1) Specified device
(read trigger) X2 turns ON.
X2
PC card
OFF
ON D20 10 D20 10
D21 20 D21 20
D22 30 D22 30
D23 40 D23 40
2) Specified device values are read and
stored onto PC card.

Device : D20
Recipe <Operation
Device points :4
Attribute Contents>tab
PC card : Use (Not set recipe device value)
dialog <Read Trigger> Trigger 1
box tab X2 ON time
POINT
Periodically writing device states to a PC card in the method (b) to back up the data
enables a return to the status (b) when a next startup or the like is made in the
method (a).
(For the GOT-F900 series, both the read and write triggers should be set in the
recipe operation setting since the read data are stored into the GOT.)
(c) Using the spreadsheet or similar software of the personal computer, edit the
device values read from the PLC CPU and saved on the PC card as a CSV
format file.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)
2) Perform read, edit, etc. of PC card file on
1) Device value data read spreadsheet software or like.
from PLC CPU Value
100
D10 100 50
D11 200 250
D12 300
Fit
PC
card
Fit PC
card
D10 100
D11 50 3) Save on PC card in CSV file format the device value
D12 250 data edited on personal computer, and use them on
GOT.
Specify the same file name as that of the edit source.
Device points: 3
Recipe <Operation
Device: D10
Attribute Contents>tab
PC card: Use
dialog <Read Trigger> Trigger 1
box tab X2 ON time
5 - 91
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The recipe function consists of the following setting items.
• "Recipe" dialog box
Recipe Attribute Operation Contents

Edit dialog box
Recipe name Set the recipe operation name.
Device Setting of Device points (1 to 8192)

points
Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit/

Signed 32bit/Unsigned 32bit/
File File name
PC card Not used/Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be
created with the recipe device) /Use (Not set recipe device value)
Read Trigger
Trigger 1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
ON/Off
Trigger 2 Unchecked/checked

ON/Off
Write Trigger
Trigger 1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
ON/Off
Trigger 2 Unchecked/checked

ON/Off
Recipe Device
Device value Setting of Device value
Delete Deletion of recipe operation
Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations
5 - 92
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Recipe Attribute Operation Contents

Edit
dialog box
Recipe name Set the recipe operation name.
Device points Setting of Device points (1 to 4000)
Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit
Read Trigger
Trigger1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
ON/Off
Write Trigger
Trigger1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
ON/Off
Recipe Device
Device value Setting of Device value
Delete Deletion of recipe operation
Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Recipe" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.
• When using the recipe function, always fit the memory board to the GOT.
(Except the A95 GOT)
• When using the recipe function, always install the extended function operating
system (recipe) into the GOT.
• When using the recipe function on the A95 GOT, use any of the A95 GOT-
TBD-M3, A95 GOT-SBD-M3 and A95 GOT-LBD-M3 among the
A95 GOTs.
• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.
5 - 93
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT)
Set WAV format sound files to play sounds as error warning messages and touch
sounds provided when touch keys are touched.
(a) When playing a sound file with the observe status function
(Condition: When the bit device X1 turns ON, a sound file is played.)
Specified bit device X1 turns ON.
X1
OFF
ON
Operation
stops.
When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes that condition

was enabled and plays specified sound file.
Sound File List dialog box Click the Edit button to register the WAV format file as a sound file.
Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog Trigger 1 : ON
box <Trigger>tab
Device : X1
<Action>tab Action : Sound
POINT
To play a WAV format sound file when a touch key is touched, turn on the [Change
touch key sound] check box in the [Project Auxiliary Setting] dialog box to make
setting.
5 - 94
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The sound function consists of the following setting items.
• "Sound File List" dialog box
Edit Sound File dialog box No.
File name
Browse Set the WAV format sound file.

Delete
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Creating Sound Files" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The sound function is not available for the A95 GOT.
• When using the sound function, always mount the memory board and external
speaker to the GOT.
• When using the sound function, always install the extended function operating
system (sound) into the GOT.
• Sound files that can be played on the GOT are in the [8.000kHz, 16 bits,
monaural] audio format. However, most of the sound files used generally are
created in other audio formats.
Hence, when using generally used sound files on the GOT, they must be
converted into the GOT format using general-purpose sound editing software
(e.g. "Sound Recorder" of Windows 95). R
For conversion, refer to the help of GT Designer.

• Sound files of within eight seconds can be played on the GOT.
Data longer than eight seconds will be cut.
5 - 95
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU)
This function shows a test window during monitor screen display to change a device
value.
(This function is available while the ladder monitor function is used.)
(a) Touch a touch key to show a test window and change a device value.
NETWK No.[ ] STATION[ ]

DEVICE[ ] [ ] RST:0 SET:1
X Y M L S
B F
G AC DEL

Touch Key <Action>
Exlended: Test Window
dialog box tab
POINT
• The device types whose values can be changed with the test function are as
follows.
• Bit device ON/OFF
• Word device's current value change
• Timer/counter's set value change
• Buffer memory's current value change
• The test function is not available for the A95 GOT.
5 - 96
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)
This function writes to the PLC CPU the data which are read with a barcode reader
connected to the GOT.
(a) Reads barcode data with a barcode reader and writes them to the specified
devices (D0 to D5) of the PLC CPU.
Barcode
Read data PLC CPU

"123456789" GOT 123456789
D0 9 (Byte : 9)
D1 3231H (Data : 21)
D2 3433H (Data : 43)
D3 3635H (Data : 65)
D4 3837H (Data : 87)
D5 2039H (Data : 9)

Device : D0
Barcode dialog box
Device points :6
(2) Setting items

The barcode function consists of the following setting items.
• "Barcode" dialog box
Device points
Delete
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Barcode" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The barcode function is not available for the A950 handy GOT.
• When using the barcode function, always install the extended function
operating system (barcode) into the GOT.
• The barcode function is not available for the F940 handy GOT.
5 - 97
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally)
This function writes touch inputs, numerical inputs, screen switching, etc. to devices
from outside the GOT using an operation panel.
(a) Turns ON the bit device X0 of the PLC CPU from an operation panel outside
the GOT.
Press key preset

to turn ON X0.
OFF
X0
ON
X0
X0 ON
External I/O unit must be fitted.

Edit Operation Panel dialog Available Operation Panel : Checked
box Key : X39
Edit Action/Key <Action> Bit Device : X0
code dialog box tab Action : Set
(2) Setting items

The operation panel function consists of the following setting items.
• "Edit Operation Panel" dialog box
Edit Action/Key code Action

Operation panel key
dialog box
Initialize Bit ..............
Action / key code Word ........... Same settings as in touch keys

Base ............ can be made. Refer to Section
Available Operation Panel
Window ......... 5.5 for setting details.
Initialize Mode A8GT-TK
Station No. ......
Edit Change the setting.
Key code Set the Key code.
Security Set the Security.
Simultaneous press Unchecked/checked
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range

16bit/32bit
Range Edit Range dialog box

...Set the conditional expression for word device range.
5 - 98
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Operation Panel"
POINT
• The operation panel function is not available for the A950 handy GOT.
• When using the operation panel function, an external I/O unit must be fitted to the
GOT.
• When using the operation panel function, always install the extended function
operating system (external key input) into the GOT.
• The operation panel is incompatible with the operation screens dedicated to the
utility menu, system monitoring function, ladder monitoring function, special
module monitoring function and list editor function.
• If you have pressed the touch key and operation panel at the same time, both are
made valid and the one detected first is processed first.
5 - 99
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time)
This function performs the following operations at the preset times of day on the preset
days of week.
• Turns a bit device ON/OFF.
• Writes a value to a word device. (GOT-A900 series only)
• Plays a sound file from an external speaker. (GOT-A900 series only)
(a) Holds M0 ON between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM from Monday to Friday.
Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday

8:00 17:00 8:00 17:00
OFF
M0 ON ON
ON M0 OFF OFF
M0 Starting End Starting End
time time time time

<Time>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Mode: Daily, Start: 8h 0min Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min.
<Time>tab (GOT-F900 series only) Start: 8h 0min. 0sec. Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min. 0sec.
<Action>tab Bit Device: M0
(b) Plays sound 1 and writes "9999" to D100 at 8:00 AM on Monday, and plays
sound 2 and writes "0" to D100 at 5:00 PM on Friday.
(GOT-A900 series only)
Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday
8:00 17:00
D100 0000 9999 It's a start D100 9999 0000 Have a nice
of this week!! weekend!!

<Time>tab Mode: Through, Start: 8h 0min Mon, End: 17h 0min Fri
Word Device: D100, Start write value: 9999, End write value: 0
<Action>tab
Sound Start: 1, End: 2
5 - 100
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The time action function consists of the following setting items.
• "Time action" dialog box
Time action attribute Time
Edit
dialog box Mode Daily/ Through
Start h/min. Starting time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting
End h/min. End time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Ending day-of-week setting
Action
Bit Unchecked/
checked
Word Unchecked/
checked
Data Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Data type 16bit/32bit
Start write Set the value to be written at start.

value
End write Set the value to be written at end.
value
Sound Unchecked/
checked
Sound File List
Start ...Browse sound file.
dialog box
Sound File List

End ...Browse sound file.
dialog box
Delete Deletion of time action

Delete all Deletion of all time actions
5 - 101
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Time action attribute Time
Edit
dialog box Mode Daily
Start h:min.:sec. Starting time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting
End h:min.:sec. End time setting.
Action
Bit Unchecked/
checked
Delete Deletion of time action Device Device dialog box
Delete all Deletion of all time actions ...Setting of Device No.
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Time action" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• Up to 32 points can be set to one project.
Also, "bit", "word" and "sound output" can be set together per point.
• When the connected PLC CPU does not have clock data, the time action
function is unusable.
• Up to 8 points can be set to one project.
5 - 102
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition)
This function collects data stored in word devices at specified intervals or on bit
condition.
(a) Samples four consecutive devices, starting from the specified word device
(D0).
Sampling results can be displayed on the GOT in list or graph format.
Also, they may be read to GT Designer and saved onto FD or processed as
text data on a personal computer.
Sampling condition: Intervals (1 minute)
400
300
200
Displayed as graph
100 or list.
0
D100 D101 D102 D103
Upload
Sampling at intervals of 1 minute.

Save onto FD
Edited as text data.

Device : D0
Sampling dialog box Trigger : Cycle (1 min.)
Use Sampling : checked
5 - 103
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The sampling function consists of the following setting items.
• "Sampling" dialog box
Trigger Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Cycle Set the Sampling Interval.
Start Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Time Set the Time.
End Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Time Set the Time.
Frequency Set the Frequency.
Use Sampling Unchecked/Checked
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Sampling" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
Sampling results can be printed by a printer connected to the GOT.
(This cannot be performed when the PLC is connected by RS-232C
communication.)
5 - 104
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program)
This function controls a GOT display under the GOT's original programs (hereafter
abbreviated to scripts).
Using the GOT side scripts to exercise GOT display control, load on the system side
(PLC CPU, microcomputer, etc.) display can be reduced significantly.
POINT
Refer to "Chapter7 Script functions" for details of the script function. This chapter
provides details on the specifications, setting procedures, program examples and
troubleshooting of the script function.
Also refer to Section 7.4 for the setting methods of specific examples explained in
the function outline and the program data of scripts.

Using the script function enables the following display controls.
(a) Touch keys with interlock functions
The Running lamp is lit when the Ready and Run/Stop switches turn
ON.
Running Running Running Running
Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop
Touch Ready button. Touch Run/Stop button. Running lamp is lit.
(b) Lamp which changes in display text under multiple conditions

Operation controls of lines are exercised with corresponding touch keys
and the control states of the three lines are represented by one lamp.
All lines stop Line 1 running Lines 1, 3 running All lines stop
Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Stop all lines Stop all lines Stop all lines Stop all lines
Line 1 running appears. Lines 1, 3 running appears. All lines stop appears.
(c) Password input screen with clock limit function

The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct
password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.
Touching Manager button switches to
Manager password input screen. Manager password Manager screen
Manager 3238 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
135 25 4328
Manager password input screen returns to
previous screen if there is no correct
Touch Manager button. password entry for 10 seconds. Type Manager password. Manager screen appears.
5 - 105
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The script function consists of the following setting items.
• "Script setting" dialog box
Project
Add Script No. Script number setting list Script View dialog box Choose the Script.
Script Edit dialog box File name Script file name designation reference Browse Choose the File name.
Comment Comment setting to script file
Data Format Signed BIN 16Bit/Unsigned BIN 16Bit/BCD 16Bit/Signed BIN
32Bit/Unsigned BIN 32Bit/BCD 32Bit/Real 32bit
Trigger Ordinary
Format ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Sampling/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Sampling Interval Set the Sampling Interval.
Previous Switch to preceding script file.
Next Switch to next script file.
Script Edit Script file editing
Syntax check Grammar check on script file
Edit
Copy Copying of script setting
Paste Pasting of script setting
Delete Deletion of script setting
Up Move up the script setting execution order.
Down Move down the script setting execution order.
Screen
Screen Base/Window Screen No.
Type
Add Script Editing dialog box ............ Same settings as in project
Edit
Copy Copying of script setting
Paste Pasting of script setting
Up Move up the script setting execution order.
Down Move down the script setting execution order.
Script View Script View dialog box Browse Browse dialog box ...Path reference
Script Edit Script file editing

Convert file
Path Replace Before
path dialog box
After
All the same Unchecked/
passing is checked
converted
Syntax Check Grammar check on script file
All Check Grammar check on all script files
Script No. Setting of script file number to be displayed
Symbol Setting Script Symbol dialog box ...Character string replacement
Editor Select Editor Select dialog box Use Notepad/ Use Word Pad
Select Path Setting of path to editor

Option Editor option designation
5 - 106
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Script" from Contents
of Help.
5 - 107
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.9 Useful Functions
The following functions are useful.

• Screen call function................ Reduces project data capacity.
• Security function..................... Limits users.
• Offset function ........................ Shows multiple devices by setting of one device.
• Expression function................ Processes PLC CPU operation on GOT.
5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity)
This function shows other called screens over a basic screen as a single screen.
(a) Shows the same display information on multiple screens.
Necessary screen memory space/display setting is for one screen only.
98/7/25
D10 70
D20 10
Base screen 2
Base screen 4 Base screen 8

Base screen 4 call setting dialog box Screen type: Base screen No.: 2
(b) Shows multiple called screens on a single screen.
D
A FED
B CDE

Base screen 5

Screen type: Base screen No.: 1
Base screen 5 call setting dialog box
(c) Shows a screen having a layered (nest) structure.

As a single screen can display up to 16 levels of nesting, screen design of
high freedom can be performed. (Only the GOT-A900 series)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
2000/8/15 A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348 Window screen 1
B 348 B 348

Window screen 3
Base screen 6
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
5 - 108
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Base screen 5 call setting dialog box
Screen type: Window screen No.: 1
Base screen 6 call setting dialog box Screen type: Window screen No.: 3
(2) Setting items

The screen call function consists of the following setting items.
• "Setting up Overlap screen" dialog box
Screen type Base screen
Window screen
No Screen number designation
Screen Image
Screen Image Display of screen image list
dialog box

No. Screen number designation
Screen Image Screen Image dialog box Display of screen image list
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Choose "Operations after making screens" "Setting up Screen call" from
Contents of Help.
POINT
• The items available for the screen call function change with the GOT used as
indicated below.
Item When using GOT-A900 series When using GOT-F900 series
Setting target screen Base screen, window screen Base screen
Max. number of called
2047 5
screens 1
Max. number of layered
16 (excluding source screen) Nesting not allowed
(nesting) levels 2
1: Indicates the maximum number of called screens relative to the basic screen (source screen).
2: Indicates levels on which screens will be further called.
• Called screen combinations cannot be changed during screen display after
transfer to the GOT.
5 - 109
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(4) What you should know to use the screen call function (when using
GOT-A900 series)
(a) Order of displaying called screens
When multiple called screens exist on one screen, the display order is
determined by the order of setting on GT Designer and the order of called
screen levels.
Called screens are displayed in the following numerical order.
Since screens displayed later are shown on earlier ones, latter screens
come to front.
Order of call setting to one screen on GT Designer
2000/8/15
A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348
2
1 6
1 9
1
Called screen level order
Line
1
3
1 5
1 7
1 8
1 10
1
A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348
Line
2
4
1 11
1
Line
3
• Up to 16 nesting levels, not including the base screen, are displayed.

• When multiple call settings were made on the same screen, screens are shown in the setting order on GT Designer.
• Among called screens having a layered (nest) structure, deeper screens are shown later.
• A screen having multiple call settings is displayed later than a called screen having a layered structure.
POINT
The security function, observe status function and script function set on called
screens are also processed in the same order as the called screen displaying
order.
5 - 110
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(b) Instructions for superimposing a called screen

When superimposed, a called screen is shown as described below, and
therefore, setting should be made carefully.
1) When screen displays are overlapped
• Figure data
A called screen figure appears at the front.
Base screen Called screen Called screen display
• Object data
Out of the objects on a base/window screen and on a called screen,
the object whose value changed appears at the front.
12345 12345
000001
+ 000001

Every time object value changes,
object whose value changed
comes to front.
• Touch keys
At first, the touch key on the screen displayed later appears at the
front. After that, the touch key whose display condition changed
appears at the front.
Base screen Called screen Screen display
5 - 111
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
POINT
• Touch keys on called screens 1 to 99 are valid. The other touch keys are all
invalid.
Among overlapping touch keys, those on up to the sixth screen, counting from the
basic source screen, are activated.
Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch
Called screen 100
Called screen 99
Called screen 98
Called screen 9
Called screen 8
Called screen 7
Called screen 6
Called screen 5
Called screen 4
Called screen 3
Called screen 2
Called screen 1
Basic screen (source screen)
: Touch key activated. : Touch key not activated.

: Represents that called screens 9 to 98 do not have overlapping touch keys.
• When called screen touch keys are overlapping, the touch keys are activated in
order of upper to lower ones. Hence, the key may not be activated if touching time
is short.
• If simultaneous touch disable keys are overlapped, they are inactive.
2) When objects that may be set only once on a single

screen are superimposed
When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. data
list and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the
function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly.
5 - 112
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(5) What you should know when using the screen call function (when
the GOT-F900 series is used)
When superimposed on a base screen, a called screen is shown as described
below, and therefore, setting should be made carefully.
(a) When screen displays are overlapped
1) Figure data
A called screen figure appears at the back.
2) Touch keys
The touch key on the called screen appears at the front.
If touch keys are overlapped, only the base screen touch key functions
when touched.
Base screen Called screen Screen display
(b) When objects that may be set only once on a single screen
are superimposed
When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. keyboard
and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the function is
restricted and the display is not provided correctly.
5 - 113
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.9.2 Security function (limits users)
By setting the security level (0 to 15) for each object or screen, display data can be
displayed or hidden according to the security level of the user.
A password can be set for each security level, which can be changed by inputting the
corresponding password.
(The GOT-F900 series allows only the security level of the base screen to be set.)
Security level 0 : No security function is set.
Security level 1 : Low
Security level 15: High

(a) Changes the object functions which can be performed by specific persons.
On the following screen where many object functions have been set, change
the operative items depending on operators.
150
0 For checking/changing the production target
Power Switches line power ON/OFF.
Line control screen
Production target Run Starts the line.
150
0
Stop Stops the line.
Power Run Stop Ladder
Ladder Starts the ladder monitor function.

Password
Password Shows the password input screen.
Operation items ( : Operative, : Inoperative)
Operator Security level 150

0
Power Run Stop Ladder Password
Check Change
1 Field worker 1
Field
2 responsible 2
person
Plant
3 3
manager
Maintenance
4 /inspection 15
person
Others 0
5 - 114
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Security level: 0
Line control screen Line control screen
You can perform
Production target Production target
Security level: 1 operation for line
Line control screen 150 150 run/stop.
Run Stop Run Stop
Password
1 Password

Password
You can perform
Production target Production target
Security level: 2 operation for line
150 150 power ON/OFF.
Security password input Power Run Stop Power Run Stop
screen appears.
2 Password Password

You can perform
Production target Production target operation for
Security level: 3 1500 3000 production target
changing.
Power Run Stop Power Run â
’ ~
3
Password Password
P0 M999 K
MOV 1 D1
Line control screen 187
K K
- 1234 D100 MOV
You can perform
2 D2
RST V
K
Production target
Security level: 15
MOV
MOV maintenance
90 D162
K
110 D167
K
1500
K K
MOV
/inspection using
100 D172
SET M9028
Each operator enters security Power Run Stop Ladder

D1
1
D2
2
V
47
D162
90
D167
110
D172
100
ladder monitor
DUTY 350 400 M9020
password. function.
Password
4
Item Setting Portion Settings

Production target Numerical Input dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 1 Security (Input): 3
<Action>tab Bit Device: X1 Action: Alternate
Power Touch Key dialog box
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Set
Run Touch Key dialog box
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Reset
Stop Touch Key dialog box
<Action>tab Extended Extended action: Ladder monitor
Ladder Touch Key dialog box
Password Touch Key dialog box <Action>tab Extended Extended action: Password
(b) Restricts the screen switching of base screens.

By making the security level of a destination screen higher than that of the
current screen, you can restrict the display of the destination screen. (Security
level of destination screen: 6)
Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 6
Line No.1
Destination A 1254 A 1254
screen security B 348 B 348
Line1 level: 6
Cancel Cancel
Touch the touch key Since the security level of the destination screen is The security level is changed The base screen is
(base switching) to higher than that of the current screen, the password to a level higher than that of changed.
switch the base screen. screen for changing the security level is displayed. the destination screen.
After pressing the Cancel key, press the - key to
return to the previous screen.

Destination screen security
Screen auxiliary setting dialog box Security: 6
level
5 - 115
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The security function consists of the following setting items.
• "Security" dialog box
Set whether the security level is valid or invalid and the password for converting
the security level.
Level device Unchecked/
checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device
Edit Password dialog box ...Setting of Password
Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of level password
• "Screen Auxiliary Setting" dialog box

Set the security level for the screen.
• "Security function setting object setting" dialog box

Set the security level for each object.
Input object
Security (Display) Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Security (Input) Setting of Security (0 to 15)
Display object
5 - 116
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Setting method

method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].
2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up
Password" from Contents of Help.
POINT
• How to set the security password
Before using the security function, you must set the password of each security
level.
Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the setting method.
• How to change the security level
When you want to change the security level during operation of the GOT, use the
following procedure.
1) Perform either of the following operations on the GOT monitor screen to show
the password.
• Touch the touch key (extended) for switching to the password screen.
• Touch the password on the utility screen.
2) On the password screen, type the password of the security level you want to
change, and touch .
When stopping the security level change, touch in the password display
window.
3) The security level of the current screen is changed and the screen provides the
display which matches the security level.
• If you forgot the security password, security cannot be canceled. Write down
the password so that it may never be forgotten.
5 - 117
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device)
The value of the set offset device is added to the monitor device address to monitor
devices.
(a) Shows multiple device values with one numerical display function.
(Monitor device: D100 to D199, offset device: D200)
Production screen Production screen Production screen Production screen
Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 1 Line 5

Key window
Production 1025 Production 1025 1025
Production 1025 Production 28532
Production of line 1 is Touch the line input area. Type the line you want to display. Production of line 5 is
displayed. displayed.
Offset value: 1 Offset value: 5
Device: D100+1=D101 Device: D100+5=D105
Line Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab Device: D200
Numerical Display dialog <Basic>tab Device: D100
Production
box <Option>tab Offset Device: D200
(b) Shows comments in synchronization with the offset function.

(Input devices: D100 to D199, offset device: D200, displayed comment No.:
D200)
Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen
Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1

Product Engine Product Engine Product ƒG “
ƒ Wƒ
Engine“
ƒ Product Engine
Key window
Production 0 Production 0 Production 30 0 Production 100
Settings of line 1 are displayed. Touch the production Type production count Engine production
Offset value : 1 input area. of engines. setting is complete.
Comment No.: 1
Device: D100+1=D101
Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen
Line 5 Line 1 1 Line 1

Product Tire Product Key
G window
ƒ “
ƒW ƒ“
Engineƒ Product Engine
Production 0 Production 30 0 Production 0
Settings of line 5 are displayed. Type the line you want Touch the production
Offset value : 5 to display. input area.
Comment No.: 5
Device: D100+5=D105

Line Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab Device: D200
Comment Display dialog
Product <Basic>tab Device: D200
box
Production Numerical Input dialog box
<Option>tab Offset Device: D200
5 - 118
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The offset function consists of the following setting items.
• "Offset function setting object setting" dialog box
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Type "Offset" in Keyword of Help.
5 - 119
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT)
This function operates on the device value set to the corresponding object with the
preset calculation expression to perform the corresponding object function with the
resultant value.
(a) Shows a monitor device (D100) value as a numerical value having a decimal
point.
(Operation expression (monitor): $$/100)
D100 50
0.5
Operation: 50/100=0.5

Numerical Display <Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1
dialog box <Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Expression: $$/100
<Others>tab (GOT-F900 series only) Gain 2: 100
(b) Writes a numerical value with a decimal point to the PLC CPU.
(Operation expression (write): $W 100, operation expression (monitor):
$$/100)
D100 50 0.5 D100 90

0.9
Key window
Operation (monitor): 50/100=0.5 Operation (input): 0.9 100=90

Numerical Input <Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1
dialog box <Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Expression: $$/100, Write word: $W 100
<Others>tab (GOT-F900 series only) Gain 1: 100
5 - 120
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Setting items

The expression function consists of the following setting items.
• "Data operation function setting object" dialog box
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR 1/XOR 1
Expression Input Expression dialog box Expression Operator +,-,*,/,%
Monitor word 2 Hexadecimal/Decimal/Octal
Write word 2 Expression style
1 :You may set only the numerical display function. Variable Device
2 :You may set only the numerical input function. term $$
$W
$V
Numerical Enter numerical value.
term

Expression
(3) Setting method

method.
2) Type "Expression" in Keyword of Help.
5 - 121
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(4) Expression performed when GOT-A900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-A900
series.
(a) Mask operation
Logical product (AND), logical addition (OR), or exclusive logical addition
(XOR) operation is carried out by the mask value which was used for
setting the monitor device value.
1) Logical product (AND)
The result is 1 only when both bit numbers are 1.
If not, the result is 0.
Monitor device value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Preset mask value
(set in hexadecimal) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Operation result 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
2) Logical addition (OR)

The result is 0 only when both bit numbers are 0.

Preset mask value 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
(set in hexadecimal)
3) Exclusive logical addition (XOR)

The result is 0 when the bit numbers are the same.

Preset mask value
(set in hexadecimal) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
(b) Shift operation

The monitor device value is shifted in the specified direction (to right or left)
by the preset bit count.
Shifted 4 bits to the right.

Shifted 4 bits to the left.

5 - 122
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(c) Operation by formula

This function carries out the arithmetic operation of the monitor device
value using the specified expression, and displays the object according to
the result of operation.
1) Expression format
A (A • B) • C ((A • B) • C) • (D • E)
A•B A • ((B • C) • D) (A • B) • ((C • D) • E)
A • (B • C) A • (B •(C • D) ((A • B) • (C • D)) • E
• Values available for A to E
Numerical value .......... Numerical value of up to 32 digits (decimal)
including minus and decimal point are
available.
$$................................. Used to specify monitor device values as
values A to E.
$W ............................... Used to specify input values as values A to E.
(Available only when the numerical input
function is used.)
$V................................. Used to specify the monitor device values/
expression result values as values A to E.
Device.......................... Used to specify the current device values as
values A to E.
2) Available operations
Addition: + Reminder operation: % 1 Division: /
Multiplication: Subtraction:
1 The left side of the symbol is divided by the right side, and the reminder is the result
of operation.
100%3 = 1 (100/3 = 33 with remainder 1)
(d) Operation sequence

1) Sequence of expressions for other than numerical input
function
Monitor Mask Shift Operation
device value operation operation using GOT display
expression
If no expression is specified
2) Sequence of expressions for numerical input function
Operation using Mask
Input value expression Shift operation operation 2
(Write word operation) (AND)
Input value is calculated
using the expression.
Data is written
to destination
device
Numerical Operation using Reverse shift Mask

value expression operation
display (Monitor word operation) operation 1 (AND)
Written value is calculated
using the expression.
If no expression is specified
1 It is opposite to the write shift operation.
For example, if the shift operation is performed 2 bits to the right, the reverse shift
operation is carried out 2 bits to the left.
5 - 123
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
2 What arithmetic is done by write mask operation

Write mask operation is different from ordinary logical product (AND) operation.
The following arithmetic is done.
Operation result (write value)=

(processing result up to shift operation AND mask value) OR (present value AND reverse pattern of mask value)
Example: This example assumes the following setting.
Item Setting
Input value 5555H
Operation by expression None
Shift operation None
Mask value 00FFH
Device value prior to write
AAAAH
(present value)
Processing result up to shift operation Device value prior to write (present value)
and mask value are ANDed. and reverse pattern of mask value are
ANDed.
5555H AND 00FFH = 0055H AAAAH AND FF00H = AA00H
The above two processing results are

ORed and its result is handled as a write
value.
0055H OR AA00H = AA55H
(5) Expression performed when GOT-F900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-F900
series.
The value resulting from four function arithmetic done on the data of a word
element with the values entered into Gain 1, Gain 2 and Offset is displayed or
entered.
(a) Gain 1
Multiplication is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)
• Word element data Gain 1
(b) Gain 2
Division is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)
• Word element data/Gain 2
(c) Offset
Addition or subtraction is performed. (Defaults to 0 when not used)
Enter a negative value to perform subtraction.
• Word element data + Offset
Calculation is made in the following format.
Word element data Gain 1 / Gain 2 + Offset
5 - 124
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT
CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time
The following describes the outline of the procedures for common setting required for
preparing screens on the GT Designer.
For operation procedures of each item, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start
Select [ New ] in the selection dialog box of the project displayed

when the drawing software is started, and set the GOT/PLC type.
Select the [Common]-[Switching Screen] menu to set the

switching device for the base screen and the window screen
(Base screen switching device default value : D0)
Select [Common]-[Switching Station No.] menu to designate the ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ If station number is not switched,
device for switching the station number setting is not required
6
Select the [Common]-[Password] menu to set password for each

security level to show/hide objects ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ If the security function is not used,
(Default value of the security level : 0 (lowest)) setting is not required
Select the [Project]-[Option] menu to set the operation

environment (Toolbar status (shown/hidden), Display method of
grid, etc.) of the GT Designer
Select the [View]-[Color Setting] menu and designate display

colors for each object and figure by using the color list box
(Available only for 256-color TFT display)
End
6-1
MELSOFT
6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures
Operations for drawing figures are described in the help window.

For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
6.3 Operations for Object Setting
The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for drawing objects.
Start
• Select the object to draw from the [Draw] menu

• Click the button of the object to draw on the tool palette
The object drawing dialog box is displayed
6
Designate the basic tab items (basic setting, display setting, etc.)
If extension tab is not designated
If extension tab is designated

Click the Extended>> button
Designate the extended tab items

(option, expression, etc.)
After setting, click the OK button
g £
Š ƒ^Designate
’ â { ƒƒ
“ ð Š the
‚ Nƒ ƒ Ndisplay
bƒ ƒ · ‚ position of the object
‚ é
End
6-2
MELSOFT
6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen
The following flowchart gives an outline of operation procedure for creating a report
screen.
For full information, refer to the help function of the GT Designer.
Start
Choose the [Screen]-[New Screen] menu and create a new report

screen.
Choose the [Report]-[Common] menu and set the page renewal,

watch interval, abort trigger device, report print format, margins,
etc.
Choose the [Report]-[Parameter] menu and set the report

screen parameters (report style selection, page
number/time-of-day print selection, collection trigger designation).
Using report figures (line/text), set the print layout.
Using print objects (numerical/comment), set the data to be printed.
Specify the header/repeated lines.
End
6-3
MELSOFT
6.5 Installation Operations of System Program
6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT
To operate the GOT, the following system programs must be installed on the GOT.
(1) Standard monitor OS
The system program to control the monitor function
(2) Communication driver
The driver to communicate between the GOT and the PLC CPU
(3) Extended function OS (Installed as required)
The system programs which provides the GOT with the following extended
functions
• Ladder monitoring • Recipe function • Operation panel function
function
• System monitoring • Sound function • Report function
function
• Special unit monitoring • Printer function
function
• Network monitoring • Barcode function
function
POINT
The following six different combinations of extended function Operating Systems
can be installed in the GOT and used simultaneously.
1) System monitor
2) Only one of the following may be selected.
• MELSEC-A ladder monitor
• MELSEC-FX ladder monitor
• MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function 1 2
• MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function 1 2
3) Special unit, Recipe, Sound
4) Network monitor
5) List editor function (MELSEC-A) 1 2
6) Only one of the following may be selected.
• ESC printer, barcode, report, key board
• PCL printer, barcode, report, key board
• ESC printer, barcode, report, I/O
• PCL printer, barcode, report, I/O
1: Note the following when installing the "MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function", "MELSEC-Q
ladder monitor function" and "list editor function (MELSEC-A)".
• When installing either of the above, the other extended function Operating Systems to be
installed should be four or less.
• When installing the above two at the same time, the other extended function Operating
Systems to be installed should be two or less.
2: Depending on the GOT's memory area status, this function may not be installed when it is
installed in the GOT where several extended/option functions have already been installed.
In such a case, reinstall it after deleting the extended/option functions which have been
installed in the GOT.
(4) ROM_BIOS (Reinstalled as required)

ROM_BIOS is a system program designed to control the GOT hardware and to
make communication between the personal computer and GOT.
ROM_BIOS is installed the GOT before it is shipped from the factory, but when
specific functions are used, ROM_BIOS of the compatible version or later must
be reinstalled in the GOT.
6-4
MELSOFT
6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program
(1) Operations required to use new functions supported by the new

version of the GT Designer
1) When using the following function, check that the version of ROM_BIOS
installed in the GOT is compatible with the function used.
Applicable version of ROM_BIOS
Function Name
For A985 / 97 / 960GOT For A95 GOT
When using the flash PC
Version F or later Not allowed for use
card 1
QnA ladder monitor
function, Q ladder Version H or later Not allowed for use
monitor function
When using the A9GT-
FNB8M/ Version J or later Not allowed for use
A9GT-QFNB8M
When using the
Not allowed for use Version K or later
A95*GOT-TBD 2
When using the A950
Not allowed for use Version M or later
handy GOT 2
Maximum number of
base screens set (when
Version P or later
using 1025 to 4096
screens)
1: If either of the following status has occurred during use of the flash PC card, perform the
scan disk of the flash PC card on the personal computer used.
• PC card-related error code (334, 351, 352, 353, 354, and 355) was detected by the alarm
list (System Alarm) function.
• The "Data transfer error" message was displayed when you executed the screen copy of
the utility functions.
2: The corresponding ROM_BIOS is factory-installed in the GOT unit.
POINT
• How to check the ROM_BIOS version installed in the GOT
Use the memory information function of the GOT.
MEMORY INFORMATION
[ S/W Version ]
ROM_BIOS
ROM BIOS Ver.2.0.0 [C]
SYSTEM Ver.2.0.0 Version
COMM. DRIVER Ver.2.0.0
PLC MONITOR Ver.2.0.0
ESC PRINT.B-CODE Not Installed
LADDER (A) Ver.2.0.0
SP. UNIT MON Ver.2.0.0
(SP,RECIPE,WAVE)
SP. UNIT DATA Not Installed
NET WORK MON Ver.2.0.0
2) If ROM_BIOS of the GOT is not compatible, reinstall ROM_BIOS of the GT

Designer in the GOT.
POINT
• How to check the ROM_BIOS version of the GT Designer
Select the [Communication] - [Install] - [ROM_BIOS] menu, and check the version
of ROM_BIOS in the [ROM_BIOS Install] dialog box.
3) Install the OS in the GOT.
6-5
MELSOFT
(2) Precautions for installing the system program

• Before installing the system program to the GOT under use, be sure to make a
backup of the screen data stored in the GOT. (Backup data is not required if the
screen data is stored in FD or HD.)
If the system program is installed, the screen data stored in the memory of the
GOT will be deleted.
Back-up operation can be carried out by using the upload function.
• Check that the communication cable connectors are firmly attached to the
connection ports on the GOT and the personal computer.
• Set up communication of the personal computer (RS-232C port, communication
speed).
Select the [Project]-[Option] menu and set up communication.
• Do not input other data to the PC card to which the ROM_BIOS is to be
installed.
When the ROM_BIOS is installed from the PC card to the GOT, other data will
be deleted.
• Before installing the system program, be sure to remove the communication
unit/communication board/option unit from the GOT.
If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the
communication cable.
(3) Precautions while the system program is installed

• Do not turn OFF the GOT or the personal computer.
Do not disconnect the communication cable.
If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication
cable is disconnected during installation, the GOT may stop operating.
• Once installation of the ROM_BIOS is started, it cannot be canceled.
If canceled, the GOT may stop operating.
• Once installation of the OS is started, it can be canceled, but re-installation is
required.
If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication
cable is disconnected to cancel installation, the GOT may stop operating.
POINT
If the GOT does not run due to any of the above-indicated operations, reinstall
the system program in the following procedure.
1) Switch off the GOT unit.
2) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit loaded to
the GOT.
3) Hold down the following two places of the GOT display section at the same
time and switch on the GOT.
4) The "Reinstall the ROM_BIOS/OS" message appears on the GOT display

section.
5) Follow the instructions on the GOT display section to complete the installation
operation.
6-6
MELSOFT
6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS
The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for installation of the
ROM_BIOS.
Start
Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[ROM_BIOS] menu
The ROM_BIOS installation dialog box is displayed
Select the source path name and the destination (GOT/PC card)
g £
Š ’ â {
ƒ^ƒƒ
“ ð Š Click
‚ Nƒ ƒ bƒ ƒN the
· ‚ Install button
‚ é
End
POINT
The ROM_BIOS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC
card).
• If installed to GOT
The ROM_BIOS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
• If installed to PC card
The ROM_BIOS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot.
Mount the PC card which contains the ROM_BIOS to the GOT, and install the
ROM_BIOS to the built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.
1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.
2) Turn OFF the GOT.
3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the
GOT.
4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.
5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display
simultaneously.
6) The message to indicate that ROM_BIOS is being installed appears on the

GOT display, and installation is carried out.
7) Complete installation according to the instruction on the GOT display.
6-7
MELSOFT
6.5.4 Installation of OS
The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for OS installation.
Start
Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[OS] menu
The OS installation dialog box is displayed
Select
g £
Š ’ â the
{ƒ^source
ƒƒ
“ ð‚ Nƒpath
Š bƒname
ƒ ƒ
N · ‚and the destination (GOT/PC card)
‚ é
g £
Š ’ â {
ƒ^ƒƒ ‚ NSelect
“ ð Š bƒ the
ƒƒ ƒ
N ·‚type
‚ of OS to install
é
g £
Š ’ â {
ƒ^ƒƒ
“ ð Š Click
‚ Nƒ ƒ N the
bƒ ƒ · ‚ Install button
‚ é
End
POINT
The OS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC card).
• If installed to GOT
The OS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
• If installed to PC card
The OS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal
computer.
Mount the PC card which contains the OS to the GOT, and install the OS to the
built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.
1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.
2) Turn OFF the GOT.
3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the
GOT.
4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.
5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT
display simultaneously.
6) The message to indicate that OS is being installed appears on the GOT

display, and installation is carried out.
6-8
MELSOFT
6.6 Download of Screen Data
The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for downloading the
screen data.
Start
Select the [Communication]-[Download (to GOT)]-[Monitor Data] menu
The download dialog box for the monitor data is displayed
Select the destination (GOT/PC card)
Select whether to download all data or part of data

(If part of data is selected, designate the screen number to
download)
Click the Download button
End
POINT
The screen data is downloaded as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC
card).
(When using the GOT-F900 series, you cannot select the PC card.)
• If downloaded to GOT
The screen data is downloaded to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
• If downloaded to PC card
The screen data is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the
personal computer.
Mount the PC card which contains the screen data to the GOT, and select the
screen copy function from the utility screen of the GOT to copy the screen data
to the built-in memory of the GOT.
For details of the screen copy function, refer to the GOT-A900 series operating
manual (extended • option functions manual).
6-9
MELSOFT
6.7 Debugging of Screen Data
The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for debugging the
screen data downloaded to the GOT between the personal computer and the GOT.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Debugger.
Start
Activate the GT Debugger
Read the screen data downloaded to the GOT by either of the

following operations
• Select the [File]-[Open] menu
• Click the button
Start communication between the GOT and the personal

computer by either of the following operations
• Select the [Communication]-[Start] menu
• Click the button.
Debug each screen
Save the device values designated by the debugging operation

(By reading this file next time, device values set previously can
be used for debugging)
End
6 - 10
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
7.1 Overview
This chapter explains the script functions which can be used with the GOT-A900
series.
The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original
programs (hereafter abbreviated to "scripts").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script reduces the load sharply on the
system side (e.g. PLC CPU, microcomputer) display.
7.1.1 Features
(1) Ease of system maintenance

Using the script functions, the system side needs only machine control programs,
facilitating system maintenance.
(2) A variety of screen controls exercised by GOT alone

Using the script functions enable the following operations which could not be
achieved by the GOT alone.
(a) Cooperation with various object functions
• A single lamp represents multiple bit device states.
• A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is on, and is
erased if they are all off.
• As soon as a numeric value is input, a part denoting "Already input" is
pasted to the place adjacent to the input value indication frame.
• A single touch switch is used to perform multiple operations
corresponding to multiple states.
7 • As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
(b) Complicated arithmetic processing
• A polynomial operation which was difficult to be represented in a ladder
program is represented simply on a single line.
Ladder program Script
D5=(D1-D2)/100+(D3-D4)/100
• Not only four fundamental operations but also various application

arithmetic functions, such as trigonometric and exponential functions, can
be used optionally.
(c) Unlimited application fields
• The corresponding year, month and day are found by the entry of year,
month and day and the entry of the number of days.
When will it be 345 days after May 20, 2000? April 30, 2001
• The day of the week is found by the entry of year, month and day.
What day of the week is February 21, 1961? Tuesday
7-1
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Easy-to-understand programming language

As a script is a language type program like the C language, all you need is entry-
level programming knowledge to create programs.
(4) Programming editors available on the market

You can use the familiar text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windows -standard memo
R R
pad, Wordpad) for programming to improve program productivity.
(5) Execution condition selectable on script basis

Any of various conditions (any time, periodic, bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF, during
bit ON/OFF, periodic during bit ON/OFF) may be chosen as a trigger to execute
each script, enabling script execution scheduling.
(6) Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is like the C language, the general C language compiler or
debugger (e.g. Microsoft Visual C++) can be used for simulation by making
R
slight corrections. This is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses
many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using the GOT.
You can use the test and device monitor functions to check conditional branching
in a script. By monitoring the GOT special registers (GS), you can easily check
error information and a script in execution.
(7) Grammar check on created scripts

Before executing created scripts on the GOT, you can make a grammar check on
GT Designer, increasing programming efficiency.
(8) Digital's script language convertible 7

You can convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital
package "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver. 3.0)" and operate it on the GOT.
POINT
• Make "execution condition setting" and "grammar check" on GT Designer at the
time of monitor screen creation. Refer to GT Designer help for details.
• Digital's script language is converted on GT Converter.
Refer to the GT Converter help for convertible data and converting method
details.
7-2
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.1.2 Operating instructions
You should know the following instructions to use the script functions.
(1) Usable range of the script functions
Since these functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them
to exercise machine control which demands severe timings.
For data changes to be made from the GOT to the PLC, configure up an interlock
circuit in a sequence program to ensure that the whole system will operate safely.
(2) Stopping the script processing

In any of the following cases, the corresponding script processing is stopped,
resulting in an error.
• A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
• A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit
BCD" was selected as a script data format.
Example) [D0]=[D1]: Present value of D1 is "0x991A"
• An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit
BCD" was selected as a script data format.
Example) 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999
32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
• As the write destination device of the while statement, a temporary work (TMP)
was not used but the PLC CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) was used.
POINT
• Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the usable data ranges.
• Refer to Section 7.2.2 for details of the while statement.
• Refer to Section 7.5 for the actions to be taken when script processing has
stopped.
(3) Differences in processing result between data formats

Note that any of the following cases will produce an unintended processing
result.
• When the script data format selected is other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit
BCD", the constant described is outside the range of the selected data format.
• When the script data format selected is "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit
unsigned BIN", the constant described is negative.
• When the script data format selected is other than "real number", the constant
described is with a decimal point.
POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the data formats.
(4) Instructions for monitor device description

Some PLC CPU devices to be monitored require their device numbers to be
described in the specific number of digits.
Note that a malfunction may occur if they are not described in the specific
number of digits.
POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the describing method.
7-3
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(5) Instructions for substitution delay

The script function writes the operation result to the PLC CPU at an end of one
script.
Hence, performing substitution processing as in "Example 1" causes a write
delay.
Describe a script as in "Example 2" to minimize the frequencies of
communications with the PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing.
Example 1) Substitution processing using PLC CPU devices
[w:D1]=[w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into D1.

[w:D2]=[w:D1]; //substitutes D1 into D2.
D0 100 100
D1 200 100
D2 300 200
Script start Script end
In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately,

causing a write delay. This status persists until this script is
processed.
Note that using the GOT internal devices (GD, GB) as the
substitution devices will give the same result.
Example 2) Substitution processing using temporary works
[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into TMP0001.

[w:D1]=[w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
D0 100 100
D1 200 100
D2 300 100
Script start Script end
Using the temporary works designed for script functions prevents a

write delay.
POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the temporary works.
7-4
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.2 Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the script functions.
7.2.1 Types
There are the following types of script functions.
(1) Project script function

This type of script operates for the whole project created on GT Designer.
The project script function can always be performed during online processing of
the GOT.
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.
Up to 256 scripts can be set to one project.
POINT
• Operating for the whole project, a project script is useful for the following case:
Example) As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
• The project script monitor devices are always operating.
Therefore, note that a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor
screen slower in response.
(2) Screen script function

This type of script operates for each screen created on GT Designer.
The screen script function may be performed only while the corresponding
screen appears during online processing of the GOT.
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.
These scripts may be set on base screens/window screens (super impose
window, overlap window 1, overlap window 2).
Screens called by the screen calling function will also be the target of script
processing.
However, screens shown by the part display function will not be the target of
script processing.
Up to 256 scripts can be set to one screen (including the screen called by the
screen calling function).
POINT
• Refer to Section 4.1 for details of each screen.
• Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.
• Refer to Section 5.4.1 for details of the part display function.
• The project script monitor devices are always operating. Hence, a larger number
of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response.
• Note that a larger number of screen script monitor device points will make the
monitor screen slower in response.
7-5
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.2.2 Control structure
This section describes the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to
program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.
Item Command Description
[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression),
and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions}.
if
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to
perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program
sequence.
[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions 1}else{set of expressions 2}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression),
and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions 1},
if to else or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to
perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program
sequence.
[Statement example] while(continuous conditional expression){set of expressions}
[Function] Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true
(other than 0), repeats executing the {set of expressions}.
If the "continuous conditional expression" is false (0), execution exits
from the while statement.
while [Point] • A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a
specific purpose.
(For example, waiting for touch key input)
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0)
results in an endless loop.
• A temporary work must be used as the write destination device.
Control [Statement example] switch(term)
statement {
case constant:set of expressions;break;
case constant:set of expressions;break;
default:set of expressions;
}
[Function] Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case,
break and default.
switch In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions"
case following the case and default statements.
default • The (term) value matches the "constant"
brake • It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
In either of the following cases, execution exits from { } of switch.
• There is a break statement within a script
• There are no case statements having the "constants" corresponding
to the (term) and no default statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control
statement.
[Point] The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires
different processings to be performed.
[Statement example] return;
return [Function] Ends a script.
[Point] A single script can have multiple returns.
[Statement example] ;
; [Function] Represents the end of a single statement. This symbol is necessary at
the end of a single statement.
7-6
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)&&(relational operation
expression)){.....}
&& [Function] 1 if two (relational operation expressions) are both true, or 0 if either is
false.
(Logical AND operator)
[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)||(relational operation
Logical expression)){.....}
|| [Function] 1 if either of relational operation expressions is true, or 0 if both are
false.
(Logical OR operator)
[Statement example] if (!(relational operation expression)){.....}
! [Function] 1 if the relational operation expression is 0, or 0 otherwise.
(Logical NOT operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> < <term 2>
<
[Function] <Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> <= <term 2>
<= [Function] <Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>.
(Equivalence left inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> > <term 2>
>
[Function] <Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)
Relational
[Statement example] <Term 1> >= <term 2>
>= [Function] <Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>.
(Equivalence right inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> != <term 2>
!=
[Function] <Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> == <term 2>
==
[Function] <Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)
[Statement example] <Term> + <factor>
Operator +
[Function] Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)
[Statement example] <Term> <factor>
[Function] Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)
[Statement example] <Term> <factor>
[Function] Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)
Arithmetic [Statement example] <Term> / <factor>
/ [Function] Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
[Statement example] <Term> % <factor>
[Function] Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.
%
(Remainder operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
[Statement example] <Term> & <factor>
& [Function] Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit product operator)
[Statement example] <Term> | <factor>
|
[Function] Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit addition operator)
[Statement example] ~ <bit>
~
[Function] Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)
Bit device
[Statement example] <Term> ^ <factor>
^ [Function] Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit difference operator)
[Statement example] <Term> << <factor>
<<
[Function] Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)
[Statement example] <Term> >> <factor>
>>
[Function] Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)
[Statement example] <Device> = <term>
Substitution =
[Function] Stores <term> into <device>. (Substitution operator)
7-7
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
set [Statement example] set(<bit device>)

[Function] SETs <bit device>.
Device [Statement example] rst(<bit device>)
rst
operation [Function] RSTs <bit device>.
alt [Statement example] alt(<bit device>)

[Function] Inverts <bit device>.
Operator [Statement example] bmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
bmov [Function] Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting
Continuous from <word device 1>, to the number of devices specified at <integer>,
device starting from <word device 2>.
operation [Statement example] fmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
fmov [Function] Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at
<integer>, starting from <word device 2>.
sin [Statement example] sin(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)
[Statement example] cos(<word device or constant>)
cos [Function] Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>.
(Cosine)
[Statement example] tan(<word device or constant>)
tan [Function] Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>.
(Tangent)
[Statement example] asin(<word device or constant>)
asin
[Function] Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)
acos [Statement example] acos(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)
[Statement example] atan(<word device or constant>)
atan
Application [Function] Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)
Function arithmetic [Statement example] abs(<word device or constant>)
operation abs [Function] Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.
(Absolute value)
log [Statement example] log(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the logarithm of <word device or constant>. (Logarithm)
[Statement example] log10(<word device or constant>)
log10 [Function] Calculates the logarithm (common logarithm) of base 10 <word device
or constant>. (Common logarithm)
[Statement example] exp(<word device or constant>)
exp
[Function] Calculates the power of base e <word device or constant>. (Exponent)
[Statement example] 1dexp(<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)
1dexp [Function] Calculates the <word device 2 or constant 2> power of <word device 1
or constant 1> 2. (Exponential product)
sqrt [Statement example] sqrt(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)
[Statement example] Constant
Constant [Function] Represents a constant (decimal/hexadecimal/BCD/real number).
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of constants.
[Statement example] [Device type:device number]
Others Device and temporary
work [Function] Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary work.
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the devices and temporary works.
[Statement example] //(comment)
Comment //
[Function] A comment for a script can be described in (comment).
7-8
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods
(1) Script data formats

You can choose any of the following seven different data formats for the script
functions.
Note that the data format selected is fixed on a script basis.
• 16-bit, signed BIN
• 16-bit, unsigned BIN
• 32-bit, signed BIN
• 32-bit, unsigned BIN
• 16-bit BCD
• 32-bit BCD
• 32-bit real number
POINT
Select the data format on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.
For selective operation details, refer to the GT Designer help.
(2) Usable constants and representation methods

The following four different constants are usable with the script functions.
Constant Representation Method

Decimal number 124
Hexadecimal number 0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1
Real number 32.124, 3.2124e + 10
BCD 344
Note that the data format of each script determines the usable constants and
data ranges as listed below.
Data Format Usable Constant Usable Data Range

Decimal number -32768 to 32767
16-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFF
Decimal number 0 to 65535
16-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number -2147483648 to 2147483647
32-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFFFFFF
Decimal number 0 to 4294967295
32-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
BCD 0 to 9999
16-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 270F
BCD 0 to 99999999
32-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 5F5E0FF
Real number
32-bit real number
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
7-9
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Usable devices and representation methods

The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other
monitor functions.
The device types and whether the station number is specified or not change how
devices will be represented as indicated below.
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example

Word device [w:device number 2] [w:D100]
Bit device [b:device number 2] [b:X100]
Specified bit of word device [b:device number 2. bit position] [b:D100.01]
Specified word of bit device [w:device number 2] [w:X100]
Station number-specified [Network number-station
[0-FF:w:D100]
device 1 number:w:device number 2]
1: When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network number and station
number monitors the devices of the own station (0-FF).
2: Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device number must be described in the
number of digits as indicated below.
Number of Digits Described (Digits) Representation

PLC CPU Used Device Name Remarks
Word specified Bit specified Example
.. 2 [b:..2303] Because of the channel + relay
OMRON PLC format, the relay part is described in
LR, AR, HR, WR 2 [b:HR207]
2 digits.
The file number is described in 3
[w:B000003]
B 6 7 digits, the element number in 3
[b:MB02343]
digits, and the bit position in 1 digit.
Allen-Bradley PLC
N, TP, TA, CP, CA 6 [w:N007255] The file number is described in 3
TT, TN, CU, CD, digits, and the element number in 3
6 [b:TT004255]
CN digits.
The data block (DB) is described in
SIEMENS PLC D 9 [w:D000100000] 4 digits, and the data word (DW) in
5 digits.
POINT
Devices that may be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor destination PLC
CPU. Refer to Section 4.8 for details.
7 - 10
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(4) Usable temporary works and representation methods

Up to 1024 points of temporary works may be used with global variables (double
word type) without initial values.
The temporary work representation changes with the specified device type as
indicated below.
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example

Word device [w: temporary work number] [w:TMP0001]
Bit device [b: temporary work number. bit position] [b:TMP1023.01]
Temporary works are used in the following cases.

Example 1) Prevention of a write delay in substitution processing performed for
the PLC CPU (refer to Section 7.1.2)
Example 2) Write destination device of while statement (refer to Section 7.2.2)
Example 3) Variable for operation
When substituting a D0 + 1 value into D1 and substituting a D1 + 1
value into D2
[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0]+1; //substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.

[w:D2]=[w:TMP0001]+1; //substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.
POINT
Note that as the temporary work is a global variable, performing write from multiple
scripts different in data format may make the data unauthorized.
7 - 11
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(5) How to represent bit devices (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.
(a) When performing relational operation of bit device
A device value, which is normally represented "1" or "0", may also be
represented "ON" or "OFF".
if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
(b) When performing substitution processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented with a set or rst statement or by
substituting "1" or "0", may also be represented by substituting "ON" or
"OFF".
set([b:X100]); //X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=1; //X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=ON; //X100 turns ON.
(6) How to replace devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced by any character string.
Make user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer.
For details of the setting method, refer to the GT Designer help.
Example: When replacing "X100" with "LS1-ERROR" on GT Designer
if(LS1-ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100}; //if X100(LS1-ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.
7 - 12
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.2.4 Script execution
This section explains how to execute the script functions.
(1) Execution conditions

The script function execute a script whose execution condition is enabled and
writes the result to the PLC CPU.
There are the following execution conditions.
• Any time
• Bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF
• During bit ON/OFF
• Periodic during bit ON/OFF
• Periodic (1s increments)
POINT
Set the execution condition on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.
For details of setting, refer to the GT Designer Help.
(2) Execution unit

The script function executes scripts one by one.
If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are enabled, they are not processed
concurrently.
7 - 13
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Execution sequence

The script functions are executed in the following order.
Max.
Screen Calling Function Execution Order Set on GT Execution
Function Type Order Setting Screen Order Execution
Layer Order Designer Sequence
Count
Script A 1)
Project script function Script B 256
Script A 2)
Base Script B
Script A
First called screen Script B
Base 256
Script A
16th called screen Script B
Script A 3)
Superimpose window Script B
Script A
Superimpose window 256
Script A
Screen script function

Script A 4)
Overlap window 1 Script B
Script A
Overlap window 1 256
Script A
Script A 5)
Overlap window 2 Script B
Script A
Overlap window 2 256
Script A
POINT
Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.
7 - 14
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(4) Execution status

The script function performs any of the following processings according to the
script status.
Script Status Processing

• A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution
Waiting for turn sequence.
• When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".
• Processing changes depending on whether the execution
condition is enabled or disabled.
Waiting for execution Enabled: The corresponding script is "executed".
Disabled: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next
script "waits for execution".
• When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC
CPU and the corresponding script "waits its turn".
Also, the next script "waits for execution".
• If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next
Execution
script "waits for execution".
• When a screen change takes place during use of the screen script
function, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all
"executed" and the next script then "waits for execution".
Stop • The script is kept "stopped" until error history clear is performed.
7 - 15
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution
This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script functions.
Start
Create/edit scripts on the text editor commercially available. ......... Refer to Section 7.4.
When many control statements were used to create a ......... Refer to Section 7.5.1.
complicated script, perform operation simulation as required
with a general C complier.
Read the created scripts to project data on GT Designer and ......... Refer to GT Designer Help.
set the data format, trigger type, etc.
Make grammar check on the read scripts on GT Designer. ......... Refer to GT Designer Help.
No
Grammatical?
Yes
Download the project data from the personal computer to the .........
GOT on GT Designer. Refer to Section 6.6.
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the ......... Refer to Section 7.5.2.
system monitor function.
No
Is operation normal?
Yes
End
POINT
The grammar check function diagnoses whether the created scripts are
grammatical or not. If a grammatical mistake is found, the corresponding script
number, line number and error definition appear. Correct the script.
7 - 16
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.4 Program Examples
This section explains script program examples.
7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function
(1) Operation
When the Ready and Run/Stop keys turn ON, the Running lamp is lit.
The system operation is controlled synchronously with the Running lamp.
Screen Image Part Operation Definition
Running lamp : Indicates the operating status of the

system.
Ready key : Acts as an interlock for the
Run/Stop key.
Run/Stop key : Used to change the operating status
(run/stop) of the system.
(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
Monitor device M0001
Ready key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device M0002
Run/Stop key Touch key function (bit)
M0003
Running lamp Lamp indication function (bit) Monitor device (System operation controlling
device)
(3) Program example

Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Any time
if ([b:M0001]&[b:M0002]==1) //if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON

{
set([b:M0003]); //the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.
Script }
else{ //if not
rst([b:M0003]); //the running lamp is extinguished and the system is stopped.
}
7 - 17
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions
(1) Operation
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control states of
three lines are represented by one lamp.
Control status lamp : The lamp color and comment are changed
according to the operating states of the
lines.
Line 1 key : Used to control the operation of line 1.
Stop all lines key : Used to stop all lines.

Monitor device D10
Indication range: $V==0 Lamp color: 182
Characters : All lines stop
Characters : Line 1 running
Characters : Line 2 running
Control status lamp Lamp indication function (word) Characters : Line 3 running
Indication method (word)
Characters : Lines 1, 2 running
Characters : Lines 1, 2, 3 running
Monitor device X1
Line 1 key Touch key function (bit)
Monitor device X2
Monitor device X3
Monitor device X0
Stop all lines key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit SET
7 - 18
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Program example

Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Any time
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=0;} //stores 0 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF.
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=1;} //stores 1 into D10 if line 1 is ON and lines 2 and 3 are OFF.
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=4;} //stores 4 into D10 if lines 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.
Script if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=7;} //stores 7 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are ON.
if ([b:X0]==ON) //if all lines stop turns ON

{
rst([b:X1]); //turns OFF line 1.
rst([b:X0]); //turns OFF all lines stop.
}
7 - 19
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function
(1) Operation
The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password
is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.
Screen with Manager key (base screen 3)
Screen change Returns in 10 seconds
Manager button : Used to shift to the password input screen

(base screen 4).
Password input : Password entered with 1 to 0 keys
appears.
1 to 0 keys : Used to enter a value.
Clear key : Used to clear the value entered.
Confirm key : Used to confirm the value entered.
Password match
Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.

Manager button Touch key function Operation setting Switching to base screen 4
Password input Numerical input function Monitor device D10
1 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0031H]
Clear key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0088H]
Confirm key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [000DH]
7 - 20
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(3) Program example

Item Description
Data
16-bit, signed BIN
format
Trigger
Any time
type
if([b:GS1.01]==ON){ //only when the password input screen has appeared

[w:TMP0001]=[w:GS7]; //substitutes GS7 into TMP0001.
}
if([w:D10]==3238){ //when the correct password is entered

[w:D0]=5; //switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
Script
[w:D10]=0; //clears the password.
}
if([w:GS7]-[w:TMP0001]>=10){ //if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password input screen had appeared
[w:D0]=3; //returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).
}
POINT
This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers (GS) store the GOT's internal information,
communication states, script error information and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by making proper connections of the
GOT special registers (GS) with the script functions.
Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).
7 - 21
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.5 Troubleshooting
The script functions do not provide error indications and so on caused by errors.
They stop the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions
from stopping.
Hence, refer to the following description and debug each script without fail.
7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger

Since a script is like the C language, slight corrections made to it allows simulation on
the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft Visual C++).
R
This function is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control
statements.
Use the following procedure to perform simulation on the general C language compiler
or debugger.
Changing file extension 1) Change the script file (extension ".txt") created
for the GOT into a C language source file
text1. txt text1. c (extension ".c").
Additional description of main and include 2) Open the C language source file on the
Additional #include<stdio.h> commercially available text editor and crate a
description frame with "main(){}". Also, describe
Additional main(){
description "#include<stdio.h>" at the beginning.
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
...... (Omitted) ......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional }
description
Changing device (variable) describing method 3) Change the device (variable) describing method
#include<stdio.h> for script function into that for C language.
main(){ When changing the variables for script function
into those for C language, changing them in the
Description wTMP0001 =0;
change following definitions enables smooth restoration
Description while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){ to the GOT script.
change
Description if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){
change
Description wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1; Definition 1 "[w:" "_w"
change
...... (Omitted) ...... Definition 2 "[b:" "_b"
Description wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003 Definition 3 "]" "_ _"
change
Description + wTMP0004 -1;
change Using the batch replacement function of the
Description wD200 = wTMP0010 %7; commercially available text editor will be
change
} convenient to make changes.
(To the next page)
7 - 22
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(From the preceding page)
Variable definition (auto variable declaration) 4) In the C language, the variables used must be
Description #include<stdio.h> defined beforehand.
change As only one data format may be selected for one
void main(void){
script in the script function, the variable types of
Addition unsigned short wTMP0000 ;
the C language must all be the same.
Addition unsigned short wTMP0001 ; Being conscious of the script data format, assign
Addition unsigned short wTMP0002 ; the variables as indicated below.
Addition unsigned short wD100 ; Script Data Format Variable Type
...... ...... 16-bit, signed BIN short

(Omitted)
16-bit, unsigned BIN unsigned short
wTMP0001 =0;
32-bit, signed BIN long
while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){ 32-bit, unsigned BIN unsigned long
if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){ 32-bit real number float
wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1; 32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD
...... (Omitted) ...... : Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data
format disables simulation on the general C language
wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003
compiler or debugger.
+ wTMP0004 -1;
wD200 = wTMP0010 %7;
}
Execution of simulation 5) Perform simulation on the general C language

compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses Microsoft R
Developer Studio.)
You can utilize the step run, variable watch and
other functions available specifically from the
debugger.
On completion of debugging, reverse the steps

1) to 4) to restore the GOT script file.
POINT
• Choosing "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation
on the general C language compiler or debugger.
• Designed for use with only the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov
statements disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.
Use substitution of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
• When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged,
the description of the define must be added to the C language source file.
• A substitution delay which occurs at the time of script execution on the GOT does
not occur during simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.
Hence, take the occurrence of a substitution delay into consideration when
performing simulation.
• By applying the above, a new program created in C language and then debugged
may also be used as a GOT script.
7 - 23
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
(1) Error checking method

The error information of the script functions is stored into the GOT special
registers (GS).
Check the stored information using the system monitor function and various
object functions (numerical display, lamp indication and others) of the GOT.
The GOT special registers (GS) have the following types of script function-related
items.
Address Item Name Description

Stores the information which indicates error occurrence.
GS14.00: Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS14.07: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS14 Script common information (read only)
GS14.08: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12: Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access to out-
of-range device).
Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the script
error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.
"-1" "16" "18" "20" ..... "46" "16"
GS15 Script error pointer
The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to 47) as
indicated below.
Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order,
starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
GS16 to 47 Script error data When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2-word
basis as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten in order.
Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a script
execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated
below.
GS48 Script execution pointer "-1" "49" "50" "51" ..... "79" "49"
The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number (GS49 to
79) as indicated below.
GS49 to 79 Script execution number Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.
GS384 Script common information (write only) Turning ON GS384.0 clears the script error data (GS16 to 47).
7 - 24
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
Address Item Name Description

Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.
If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped.
(Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
Setting Example Monitor Time

GS385 Script monitor time
0 (default) 10 seconds
1 1 second
10 10 seconds
11 11 seconds
Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following
conditions is enabled.
• The screen script function is used.
• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.
Bit Value of
GS386 Screen script initial operation Setting Example Trigger Type Initial Operation
Trigger
Bit OFF to ON ON
0 Performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
Bit OFF to ON ON
Other than 0 Not performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
POINT
• Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).
• For details of the system monitor function, refer to the GOT-A900 Series
Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible
Extended • Option Functions).
7 - 25
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT
(2) Error code list

Error Code Error Definition Corrective Action
Initialization of project script functions • Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts.
1
failed. • Reduce the number of project script functions to be executed.
Initialization of screen script functions • Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and base screens.
2
(base) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (base) to be executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and superimpose
Initialization of screen script functions screens.
3
(superimpose window) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (superimpose window) to be
executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions screens 1.
4
(overlap window 1) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 1) to be
executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions screens 2.
5
(overlap window 2) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 2) to be
executed.
The operation result is a value outside
• Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the data range
6 the usable data range determined by
of the corresponding script, and correct the script.
the data format of the script.
The number of scripts executed
• Change the number of scripts to be executed in one project to 256 or less.
7 exceeded the limit. Hence, there were
• Change the number of scripts to be executed on one screen to 256 or less.
scripts that were not executed.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was
• Check whether the device you want to monitor is correct.
selected as the script data format, the
8 • Review the processing for the device which could not be handled as BCD, and
monitor device value could not be
correct the script and sequence program.
handled as BCD.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was
selected as the script data format, the • Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the BCD data
9
operation result was brought outside the range.
BCD data range.
The numerator was divided by the • Review the factor which caused zero division in the corresponding script, and
10
denominator of 0. correct the script.
11 Write to a device failed. • Review the device description of the corresponding script.
Securing an internal area for device
12 • Reduce the number write device points in the corresponding script.
write failed.
The while statement has the description
13 of a device other than a temporary • Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary work.
work.
An expression was too complicated to
14 • Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script.
process.
A script did not end within the script • Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop.
15
monitor time. • Increase the value of script monitor time (GS385).
7 - 26
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
APPENDICES
Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data
When using the monitor screen data for GOT800 as that for GOT900, the data must be
converted using the GT Converter.
This section outlines the operation to be performed to convert the monitor screen data
for GOT800.
For details of the GT Converter, refer to the help function of the GT Converter.
POINT
• By converting the monitor screen data for GOT800 with the GT Converter, it can be used as the monitor
screen data for GOT900 without any restrictions.
Also, the data capacity of the data converted into the monitor screen data for GOT900 is about 30% less
than that of the monitor screen data for GOT800.
• When using the GOT data of earlier than the GOT800 as the monitor screen data for GOT900, perform the
following operation after converting it into the GOT data for GOT800 series using the drawing software for
GOT800 series 1 contained in GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5.
For the converting operation, refer to the SW3NIW-A8GOTP Drawing Setting Software Package
Operating Manual (Monitor Screen Creation Manual).
1 Install the software by executing "setup.exe"in the "GOT800" folder on the CD-ROM.
START
Start the GT Converter.
Select the monitor screen data for GOT800. Refer to (2).
Convert it to the monitor screen data for GOT900 and store the new data. Refer to (3).
APP
Š ’ â Start
g £ {
ƒ^ƒƒ “theð
‚ NGT
ŠDesigner
ƒƒ bƒ ƒ
N · ‚ are and edit the new data.
‚ é Refer to (4).
END
App - 1
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(1) Screen make-up of GT Converter
Menu bar
Tool bar
Main window
(2) Selecting the data to be converted

(a) Perform either of the following operations.
• Click the icon on the tool bar.
• Select the [Project] - [Open] menu.
(b) As the [Open] dialog box appears, select the file type.
• A8GOT file: Screen data for GOT800 series
• PRO file: "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS version)" made by Digital
• PRW file: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" made by
Digital
: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" made by Digital
Select the file type.
POINT
The data of the Digital package that may be converted is only the data created by "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS
version)", "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" and "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)".
(c) Select the data to be converted and click the [Open] button.
APP
1) Select the driver and folder which store
the data to be converted.
2) Select the file name of the data to be

converted.
…Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the
current one.
…Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data
names only.
…Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.
App - 2
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(d) The data selected is specified as a conversion source file and appears in the
main window.
(3) Converting to the monitor screen data for GOT900

(a) Perform either of the following operations.
• Click the icon on the tool bar.
• Select the [Start conversion] menu.
(b) In the main window, specify the folder, which will store new data.
Enter the folder directly into "Save folder", or perform the following operation
to specify it.
2) Select the folder.
1) Select the drive.
(c) Clicking the [OK] button converts the selected data to GOT900 series data.
On completion of the conversion operation, the conversion completion
message appears.
The new data is stored into the specified folder.
POINTS
• For the screen where high-quality fonts have been set for the new data, open the screen once and re-store
the project.
• When the data of the Digital package is converted, some functions are not converted.
Re-set the unconverted functions using the GT Designer.
Also use the GT Designer for registration to the overlap screen, parts and comments
App - 3
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(4) Starting the GT Designer

Start the GT Designer from the GT Converter.
(a) Select the [Project] - [Option] - [Folder of GT Designer] menu.
(b) The [Setting folder of GT Designer] dialog box appears.

Since the execution file (wgot32.exe) of the GT Designer exists in the
following folder, select it and click the [Open] button.
Drive name: \Installation destination folder\GT desig\wgot32.exe
…Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the
current one.
…Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data
names only.
…Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.
(c) Perform either of the following operations.

• Click the on the tool bar.
• Select the [Project] - [Execute GT Designer] menu.
(d) The [Execute GT Designer] confirmation dialog box appears.

Click the [Yes] or [No] button.
[Yes] button … Ends the GT Converter and starts the GT Designer.
[No] button … Ends the GT Converter.
(The GT Designer does not start.)
App - 4
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)
The display speeds (reference values) of each object are as listed below.
The actual display speeds depend on the number of objects set on a screen, the
shape of a figure drawn, and the frequencies of transient transmission.
Numeri Parts Lamp Trend Line Touch key

ASCII Comment User Level
cal display display graph graph (Bit
display displayBit alarm display
display (Bit) (Bit) display display momentary)
Object name 240×120
240×120
Drawing 6 digits, 10 48×48 48×48 dots, 160×160
6 digits —— dots, ——
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
Sequential device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
Bus connection
Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2
Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.3
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
Cyclic
Random
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
MELSECNET device
/10 connection Sequential
QnA 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
CPU device
Transient
Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
ACPU device
CC-Link
connection
(Remote
Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device station)
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
Cyclic
CC-Link Random
Display 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection device
speed
(Intelligent Sequential
(Unit : s) 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device station) device
Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
Bus connection
Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.2
Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.3
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
QCPU Cyclic
Random
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
MELSECNET device
/10 connection Sequential
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
Transient
Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
CC-Link Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection
(Remote device Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
station)
App - 5
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
Numeri Parts Lamp Trend Line Touch key

ASCII Comment User Level
cal display display graph graph (Bit
display displayBit alarm display
display (Bit) (Bit) display display momentary)
Object name 240×120
240×120
Drawing 6 digits, 10 48×48 48×48 dots, 160×160
6 digits —— dots, ——
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
Cyclic
CC-Link Random
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection device
QCPU
(Intelligent Sequential
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device station) device
Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
CPU direct
FXCPU
connection
Random device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 1.20 0.22 1.06
Programmable
Display controller by Omron
Random device 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.36 0.30 0.30 0.80 0.27 0.35
speed
(Unit : s)
Programmable
controller by Yasukawa
Random device 1.09 0.68 2.34 10.40 2.42 2.20 0.53 5.72 0.46 2.50
Programmable
controller by Allen- Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
Bradley
Programmable
controller by SHARP
Programmable
controller by Toshiba
Programmable
controller by SIEMENS
Programmable
controller by Hitachi
App - 6
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
Appendix3 List of Key Code
(1) List of key code for numerical and ASCII input

Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H)
SP 0020 @ 0040 ` 0060 0080 2
! 0021 A 0041 a 0061 0081 2
" 0022 B 0042 b 0062 0082
# 0023 C 0043 c 0063 0083
$ 0024 D 0044 d 0064 (Clear) 0088
% 0025 E 0045 e 0065 (Scroll up) 00F2 2
& 0026 F 0046 f 0066 (Scroll down) 00F3 2
, 0027 G 0047 g 0067
( 0028 H 0048 h 0068
) 0029 I 0049 i 0069
* 002A J 004A j 006A
+ 002B K 004B k 006B
, 002C L 004C l 006C
- 002D M 004D m 006D
. 002E 1 N 004E n 006E
/ 002F O 004F o 006F
0 0030 P 0050 p 0070
1 0031 Q 0051 q 0071
2 0032 R 0052 r 0072
3 0033 S 0053 s 0073
4 0034 T 0054 t 0074
5 0035 U 0055 u 0075
6 0036 V 0056 v 0076
7 0037 W 0057 w 0077
8 0038 X 0058 x 0078
9 0039 Y 0059 y 0079
: 003A Z 005A z 007A
; 003B [ 005B { 007B
< 003C \ 005C | 007C
= 003D ] 005D } 007D
> 003E ^ 005E ~ 007E
? 003F _ 005F ¦ 007F
1: Cannot be set only when the numerical input function is used on the GOT-F900 series.
2: Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
App - 7
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(2) List of key code for objects

(a) Key code for numerical input
Key code (H) Application
0008 Delete the bottom digit and shift to the right by one digit
000D Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor
001B Delete cursor
002D “-”
002E “.”
0030 to 0046 Input value
0080 Move cursor to the right
0081 Move cursor to the left
0082 Move cursor upward
0083 Move cursor downward
0088 Delete value being input
Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
(b) Key code for ASCII input

0008 Erases the rightmost character and shifts the whole one character to the right.
000D Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor
001B Delete cursor
ASCII code Input characters
0080 Move cursor to the right
0081 Move cursor to the left
0082 Move cursor upward
0083 Move cursor downward
0088 Delete value being input
(c) Key code for data list display function

00F2 Scroll up by one line
00F3 Scroll down by one line
App - 8
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(d) Key code for alarm list display function

00F2 Scroll up by one line
00F3 Scroll down by one line
FFB0 Show cursor
FFB1 Hide cursor
FFB2 Move cursor upward
FFB3 Move cursor downward
FFB8 Display detail information
FFBC Display ladder
(e) Key code for alarm history function

FFB0 Show cursor
FFB1 Hide cursor
FFB2 Move cursor upward
FFB3 Move cursor downward
FFB4 Display date/time of selected data
FFB5 Display date/time of all data
FFB6 Delete selected alarm contents on display
FFB7 Delete all alarm contents on display
FFB8 Display detail information
FFB9 Reset designated device
When using GOT-A900 series: Save alarm contents to PC card
FFBB
When using GOT-F900 series: Reset designated device
FFBC Display ladder
Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used

FFB6 and FFB7 are compatible with the OS version 3.0 and later of the GOT-F900 series.
App - 9
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752 768 784 799
0
16
32
48
64
APPENDICES
80
96
112
128
144
Appendix4 Drawing Sheet
160
176
192
208
224
240
256
272
288
304
320
336
352
368
384
For A960GOT
400
416
432
448
464
479
(1) For A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT
For A975GOT/A970GOT
480
496
512
528
544
560
576
592
For A985GOT
599
App - 10
MELSOFT
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
App - 11
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(2) For A95 GOT

0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 319
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
239
(3) For F940GOT

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 319
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
239
(4) For F930GOT

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 239
0
20
40
60
79
App - 12
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
App - 13
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value)

During printing, it is recommended that a monitor screen with fewer object functions is
displayed.
When a screen with object functions (e.g. value display function) showing many
variations is displayed on the GOT, the GOT gives priority to display of object
functions. Therefore, the printouts take longer.
The following table shows the print out time (reference value) using the hard copy
function while the monitor screen with value display function for 50 points is displayed.
Type of printer to be used
Printer applicable for Printer applicable for Printer applicable for PCL
GOT main unit Connection
ESC/P command ESC/P command (black command
(16 colors) and white)
CPU direct connection 1sec.40min. 40.9min. 31.3min.
Bus connection 1sec.39min. 40.9min. 30.9min.
A985GOT Computer link 1sec.39min. 39.1min. 30.6min.
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1sec.42min. 42.4min. 32.2min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1sec.37min. 40.1min. 33.5min.
CPU direct connection 30.5min. 20.3min. 22.9min.
Bus connection 30.3min. 21.2min. 23.0min.
A95 GOT-
Computer link 30.7min. 21.5min. 22.8min.
SBA/SBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 31.5min. 19.5min. 22.5min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 33.6min. 19.3min. 23.0min.
CPU direct connection 19.3min. 20.6min. 23.7min.
Bus connection 20.9min. 20.9min. 23.2min.
A95 GOT-
Computer link 19.1min. 20.2min. 23.1min.
LBA/LBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 22.1min. 21.9min. 22.6min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 21.6min. 19.8min. 23.0min.
Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area

(Memory Map)
The GOT's internal memory has 1152k bytes of space for the user area (area where
screen data can be stored).
When the expanded or option functions are used in the GOT, the corresponding
extended functions OSs must be installed in the GOT.
Since the extended functions OSs are stored in the user area, the free space of the
user area changes with the number of OSs installed as indicated below.
Number of Extended functions OSs 1 Memory Space Used [k bytes] User Area Free Space [k bytes] 2
0 0 1152
1 256 896
2 384 768
3 640 512
4 768 384
5 1024 128
6 1152 0
1 The MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function, MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function and MELSEC-A list editor
function are handled as two extended functions OSs, respectively.
2 The above user area spaces assume that there are no additional memory boards. Therefore, increase the
memory as required.
App - 14
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
Appendix7 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5 / GT Designer

Version5
The following tables indicate the functions added to up to version A of GT Works
Version5/GT Designer Version5.
The symbols in each table have the following meanings.
Abbreviation for GT Works Allowed for use on the GOT-F900
SW# Allowed for use
Version • GT Designer Version series only
Abbreviation for GT Works
Allowed for use on the GOT-A900
A to Z Version • GT Designer Version Not allowed for use
series only
version name
(1) GOT added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Corresponding Model
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A
A985GOT
F940GOT
F930GOT(F930GOT-BWD)
A95 GOT
A970GOT-LBA/LBD
A951GOT-Q
A95 GOT-TBD
A950 handy GOT
(2) GOT unit functions added (extended, option and other functions)
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
GOT Unit Function Function Added
Addition of brightness
Utility adjustment function
Addition of OS copy function
PC card Supporting of Flash PC cards
Extension of monitoring
device range when the
microcomputer is connected
Addition of SB and SW to
monitor devices when the
ACPU is connected
Extension of monitoring
Addition of SS, SC, S, SB,
device range
SN and SW to monitor
devices when the QnACPU
is connected
Addition of TS and CS to
monitor devices when the
ACPU/FXCPU is connected
Addition of the GOT special
Used device register (GS) to the GOT's
internal devices
Supports the monitoring of
QnACPU
Ladder monitor
QCPU
Special module monitor
QCPU modules
Addition of the function which
displays
/edits in the list mode the
List editor
sequence
program read from the
ACPU
The maximum number of
Base screen screens increased from 1024
to 4096
Unusable with the A95 GOT
App - 15
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(3) Connection forms added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Connection Form
Bus connection to CPU
Connection with QCPU supported
Direct connection to CPU
Connection with QnACPU supported
Transparent function supported
Computer link connection
Transmission speed change (19200bps/38400bps)
supported for connection of QC24N
CC-Link connection
Q-compatible intelligent device station supported
Omron PLC connection
Connection with C200H/HS/HX/HG/HE, CQM1,
C1000H, C2000H, CV1000 supported
Connection with CV500, CV2000, CVM1-
CPU01/11/21, CS1 supported
Yaskawa Electric PLC connection
Connection with GL60S/60H/70H/120/130 supported
Connection with CP-9200SH supported
Connection with CP-9300MS and MP-920/930
supported
Connection with CP-9200(H) or PROGIC-8 supported
Barcode connection
Allen-Bradley PLC connection
Connection with AB SLC500 supported
Connection with AB MicroLogix1000/1500 supported
Toshiba PLC connection
SIEMENS PLC connection
HITACHI PLC connection
(4) GT Designer functions added

(a) Added figure drawing functions
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Figure Drawn Description of Added Function
Addition of fill pattern and fill
Circle background color setting
function
Addition of fill pattern and fill
Rectangle background color setting
function
App - 16
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(b) Object functions added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Object Function Description of Function Added
Function which performs
write to the PLC CPU when
the specified condition holds
Addition of the word device
value range as the
observation condition
specifies offset for the device
set for the condition (for
Observe status
screen-based observation
only)
The maximum number of set
conditions + operations
increased from 40 to 512
Addition of "BCD" to the data
format of the written value for
data SET operation when the
condition holds
sets undisplayed values
Line graph
displays a track
Addition of justification setting
ASCII display
function
Addition of justification setting
ASCII input
function
allows the panel meter shape
Panel meter to be selected
Addition of panel color
specifying function
Connect the barcode reader
to the GOT. Add the function
Barcode that writes the data read with
a barcode reader into the
PLC CPU.
Statistics display sets the display direction in a
Rectangle graph chart
uses character strings
created by the comment
function in character string
display
Addition of the touch key
(extended) function which
displays the brightness
adjustment screen of the
GOT
Touch key changes the comment of the
reference destination
according to the result of
adding the specified device
(up to 2 points) and fixed
values in the function which
uses on the character string
display the character string
created with the comment
function.
Addition of initial value
condition setting
App - 17
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

XORs, reverses and paints
the inside of a no-figure touch
key
Addition of the touch key
(extended) function which
Touch key shows the list editing screen
of the ACPU
Addition of auto repeat
function
specifies offset for the
operation target device
Hard copy outputs the screen image of
the F940GOT to a printer.
Addition of the Human sensor
detection signal
Addition of the I/O signal area
for external I/O equipment
System information Addition of the currently
printed report screen area
Addition of the report output
signal
Addition of hard copy signal
allows an operation panel to
Operation panel
be connected for operation
from outside the GOT
External I/O transfers signals to/from
outside the GOT
Report gathers and prints data per
trigger
The maximum number of
overlaps screens has been
changed from five to no
restriction.
further calls the screen which
uses the screen calling
Overlap screen
function (hierarchical called
screens)
Addition of window screens
as the screens to be called
and the screens which can
use the screen calling
function
Addition of "Rise", "Fall", "ON
Sampling" and "OFF
Trend graph
Sampling" triggers to the
display conditions
can fix displayed parts (parts
can be overlapped) and the
function which can display the
base screen as a part
sets the starting number
Part display function
sets the preview number
edits the object size
can display window screens
as parts
App - 18
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

The set number of comparison
operation expressions of each
Data operation
object has been increased from
16 to 64.
controls the display/operation
Trigger type
of each object according to
several (2 to 8) bit conditions.
Clock display function Addition of the display format
Comment function
sets the starting number
Bar graph sets the display position of a
scale
gathers data stored in word
Scatter graph devices associated with the X
and Y axes and displays
them as a scatter graph
performs operation, such as
Time action
device write, at the specified
time of the day of the week
collects data in the specified
Sampling function cycle or under the bit
condition and displays them
in a graph or the like.
Increase of the maximum
monitor points that can be
observed
Bit device:
Alarm history function 3072 points
Word device (16 bits):
1024 points
Word device (32 bits):
512 points
Addition of the setting which
does not create a recipe file
Recipe function automatically (does not set
recipe device values) if the
PC card has no recipe file.
can control the GOT display
Script function
with the GOT side programs
(scripts)
App - 19
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
(c) Other functions added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Edit and Setting Functions Description of Function Added
sets display or non-display
according to whether an
action condition is filled or
not.
Addition of serial
communication setting
Sub-setting of project unit
function
Addition of setup setting
function
Addition of menu call key
setting function
Addition of language setting
function
Addition of initial display
position setting function for
key window
creates a user-original key
window to use it instead of
the standard key window.
(Unusable for F930GOT)
Key window
displays the window size at
initial position setting
allows you to select whether
to display or hide the input
enabled range shown for out
of range input
can display different objects
classified by pages
Object list Addition of the function which
allows the device setting to
be changed by direct input
from inside the list
GPPW device comment can read and refer to the
reference function GPPW device comment data
as another format data
automatically changes the
"+" cursor display function
cursor indication (shape)
when a figure is drawn
Addition of the special
function keys having more
complex functions to the
Enhancement of parts
parts library of touch keys
library
Addition of new figures to the
parts library of touch
keys/lamps
allows setting to be made by
direct input on the setting
Device setting
dialog box of each object,
without using the [Device]
dialog box
App - 20
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Addition of the connection
target CPU (QCPU) divides
Changing the PLC type of the conventional PLC type
project "MELSEC-A, QnA" into two
different types of "MELSEC-
A" and "MELSEC-QnA, Q".
Grid display "Mesh" is added as a choice.
Travel "Mesh" is added as a choice.
Screen background color
sets a background color on a
setting
screen basis
Panelkit save/read
allows a panelkit to be
function
saved/read as a file
Monochrome printer
allows adjustment for output
output compatibility
to a monochrome printer
uploads the alarm
history/alarm
Upload
totalization/sampling function
data from the GOT and
saves them in a text file
batch-converts only the
Device batch-conversion
devices of the selected
object
allows selection of whether
the move and close keys are
displayed or hidden in
overlap windows 1, 2
Window screen changing
can control the overlap
window screen display
position using the specified
device value
CSV file-based comment reads a CSV file as a
read/write comment and writes a
comment as a CSV file
leaves the previously saved
data as backup at the time of
Operating environment project overwrite
can change the toolbar
display position
App - 21
APPENDICES
MELSOFT
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Addition of the functions
which improve operability for
figure drawing/editing
(shortcut keys, right-click
menu, mouse operation)
defines the user settings as
predetermined values in
figure attribute setting
browses through a list
display to choose a screen,
Improvement in drawing
comment, part or the like
setting/operability
shows the related setting
item (comment, print format,
communication, auxiliary
setting) setting screen from
the corresponding object
setting screen
selects/deselects all data
copied from the item list of
another project on the
[Import From Project] screen
Addition of new toolbars
(Main/ View/Figure •
Toolbars/icons
Object/Edit/
Draw) and icons
(5) Added GT Converter data to be converted

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Data to Be Converted
Digital's package
"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" data
L tag conversion supported
T, E tag conversion supported
W tag, D script and LS area conversion supported
Digital's package
"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" data
(6) GT Manager function added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Description of Function Added
performs cut/copy/paste on a
Project copy function project basis.
Enables backup onto multiple
FDs.
App - 22
INDEX
Ind
[A] Data list display function .................................5- 5
Additional function list................................App-15 Debugging......................................................6-10
Alarm history display function ....................... 5-18 Debugging of screen data .............................6-10
Alarm list display function.............................. 5-24 Dialog box ......................................................3-10
Animation display function Display color...................................................4-13
Lamp display function................................ 5-33 Display speed of object.............................. App- 6
Panelmeter display function ...................... 5-36 Download ........................................................6- 9
Part display function .................................. 5-27 Download of screen data................................6- 9
Part movement display function................ 5-30 Drawing sheet ........................................... App-10
Arc (ellipse arc).............................................. 4-11 Drawing figures and attribute types...............4-11
Arithmetical operation by expression.......... 5-123 Dropdown menu..............................................3- 6
ASCII display function .................................... 5- 8 DXF file...........................................................4-11
ASCII input function....................................... 5-72
Attributes........................................................ 4-13 [E]
Extended function OS.....................................6- 4
[B]
Base screen.................................................... 4- 1 [F]
Barcode function ........................................... 5-97 Figures ...........................................................4-14
Bar graph display function ............................ 5-45 Floating alarm function ..................................5-24
BMP file ......................................................... 4-11
[G]
[C] Graph display function
CD-ROM drive................................................ 2- 1 Bar graph display function .........................5-45
Check box...................................................... 3-10 Level display function.................................5-54
Circle (ellipse)................................................ 4-11 Line graph display function ........................5-42
Clock display function ................................... 5-11 Statistical graph display function ...............5-51
Command button........................................... 3-10 Trend graph display function .....................5-39
Comment display function............................. 5-14 Scatter chart display function.....................5-54
CRT................................................................. 2- 1
[H]
[D] Hardcopy function..........................................5-97
Data arithmetical operation ......................... 5-120 Hard disk space ..............................................2- 1
Data capacity How to use help .............................................3-17
Figure ......................................................... 4-17
Object function........................................... 4-20 [I]
PC card ...................................................... 4-25 Install
Data display function OS (personal computer GOT) ....................6- 8
ASCII display function ................................ 5- 8 ROM_BIOS (personal computer GOT) ......6- 7
Clock display function................................ 5-11 Installation of OS.............................................6- 8
Data list display function............................. 5- 5 Installation of ROM_BIOS ..............................6- 7
Numerical display function ......................... 5- 2
Data input function
ASCII input function................................... 5-72
Numerical input function............................ 5-68
Index - 1
[K] [P]
Keyboard ........................................................ 2- 1 Painting ..........................................................4-13
Painting background ......................................4-13 Ind
[L] Painting color .................................................4-13
Lamp display function ................................... 5-33 Painting pattern..............................................4-13
Level display function.................................... 5-54 Panel meter display function .........................5-36
Line ................................................................ 4-11 Part display function.......................................5-27
Line freeform ................................................. 4-11 Part movement display function ....................5-30
Line graph display function ........................... 5-42 PC card ...........................................................2- 5
Line style........................................................ 4-13 PC communication driver ...............................6- 4
Line width....................................................... 4-13 Personal computer..........................................2- 1
List box .......................................................... 3-10 Polygon ..........................................................4-11
List of key codes.........................................App- 7 Printer
Logging report ............................................... 5-76 (for connection with personal computer)........2- 1
[M] [R]
Mask operation............................................... 5- 7 Radio button...................................................3-10
Memory........................................................... 2- 1 Recipe function ..............................................5-90
Menu bar......................................................... 3- 2 Rectangle .......................................................4-11
Menu configuration......................................... 3- 6 Resolution .......................................................2- 1
Message display function Report function...............................................5-75
Alarm history display function ................... 5-18 Report figures.................................................4-11
Alarm list display function.......................... 5-24 Real-time report .............................................5-75
Comment display function......................... 5-14 Report screen.................................................4-10
Mouse ............................................................. 2- 1 ROM_BIOS .....................................................6- 4
RS-232C cable................................................2- 4
[N]
Numerical display function ............................. 5- 2
Numerical input function................................ 5-68
[O]
Object function list ......................................... 4-18
Observe status function ................................ 5-84
Offset function ............................................. 5-118
Operation environment................................... 2- 1
Operation for creating a report screen........... 6- 3
Operations for drawing figures....................... 6- 2
Operations for object setting .......................... 6- 2
Operations for use
of conventional model ................................App- 1
Operation panel function............................... 5-98
Operations to be set for the first time ............ 6- 1
Overlap
Figure and object....................................... 4-28
Objects....................................................... 4-28
Overlap window.............................................. 4- 4
Index - 2
[S] [W]
Sampling function........................................ 5-103 Window screen
Scale .............................................................. 4-14 Display method ...........................................4- 3
Scatter chart display function........................ 5-51 Movement method ......................................4- 3
Screen configuration ...................................... 3- 1 Overlap window...........................................4- 4
Security function.......................................... 5-114 Setting range of screen size .......................4- 2
Shift operation ............................................. 5-122 Superimpose window .................................4- 5
Sound function............................................... 5-94
Spin box......................................................... 3-10
Standard monitor OS ..................................... 6- 4
Statistical graph display function .................. 5-48
Status bar ....................................................... 3- 5
Superimpose window..................................... 4- 8
System configuration
System configuration of data transfer and
document creation ...................................... 2- 2
System configuration
of monitoring screen................................... 2- 1
System information function.......................... 5-82
System program ............................................. 6- 4
[T]
Tab................................................................. 3-10
Template
Panelkit ...................................................... 3-12
Parts........................................................... 3-12
Parts display area...................................... 3-12
Parts library................................................ 3-12
Pasting method of parts ............................ 3-14
Tree display area....................................... 3-13
Test function .................................................. 5-59
Text ................................................................ 4-11
Text box ......................................................... 3-10
Time action function .................................... 5-100
Title bar........................................................... 3- 2
Tool bar........................................................... 3- 3
Tool palette
Attribute setting list box ............................. 3-16
Cursor button ............................................. 3-15
Figure drawing button................................ 3-15
Object setting button.................................. 3-16
Touch key function ........................................ 5-57
Trend graph display function......................... 5-39
Index - 3
GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5
Reference Manual
MODEL SW5-GOTR-R-E
MODEL 13JF95
CODE
SH(NA)-080117-A(0008)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310 TELEX : J24532 CABLE MELCO TOKYO
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5 , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

[Test Operation Instructions]

6. Measures against the year 2000 (Y2K) problem

Japanese Manual Version SH-080112-A

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal.

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 6

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen ........................................................................................... 2- 1

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3- 1 to 3-18

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools ................................................................................................ 3- 1

CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION 4- 1 to 4-45

4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created.................................................................................................. 4- 1

CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5- 1 to 5-124

5.1 Data Display Functions ............................................................................................................................ 5- 2

CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT 6- 1 to 6-10

6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time................................................................................................... 6- 1

CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7- 1 to 7-26

Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data..............................................................App- 1

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 3

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

In this manual, the following products are called by new names.

• SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package

In this manual, the above products are abbreviated to the following.

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen

2.1.1 System configuration

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

2.1.2 Operation environment

2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation

2.2.1 System configuration

(1) When the GOT-A900 is used

RS-232C cable GOT-A900 Series

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

PC card with PCMCIA

Printer cable Windows R 95, Windows R 98,

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

RS-232C cable GOT-F900 series

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

Printer cable Windows R 95, Windows R 98,

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable

(1) Wiring diagram of AC30R2-9SS

(2) Wiring diagram of FX-232CAB-1

If the following cable is used, 9-25 pin converter is required.

2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

(1) About compatible PC card types

Type name Remark

Condition 1: Use the following GOT.

(2) About PC card formatting

(Note that the PC card cannot be formatted by Windows NT 4.0.) R

and browse the help.

(b) Using the self-diagnostics (memory card check) of the utility

(3) About the number of files that may be saved

Memory Capacity of PC Number of Files

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools

This section describes screen configuration and various tools.